2015 Dodge Durango Owner`s Manual

2015 Dodge Durango Owner`s Manual
2015 Durango
2015
OWNER’S MANUAL
FCA US LLC
15WD01-126-AD
Fourth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Durango
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2015 FCA US LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
䡵 ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .8
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .9
1
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and
perform tasks that conventional passenger cars are not
intended. It handles and maneuvers differently from
many passenger cars both on-road and off-road, so take
time to become familiar with your vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s
Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills
will improve with experience. When driving off-road or
working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect
the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics.
Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws
wherever you drive.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
The two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a
for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road collision. Refer to “On-Road/Off-Road Driving Tips” in
driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a “Starting And Operating” for further information.
four-wheel drive vehicle.
INTRODUCTION 5
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
ROLLOVER WARNING
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing
better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven
in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control.
Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- may not.
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
1
6 INTRODUCTION
two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
Rollover Warning Label
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the Consult the following table for a description of the
U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or this Owner’s Manual:
more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by
INTRODUCTION 7
1
8 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
vehicle. Save this label for a convenient record of your
vehicle identification number and optional equipment.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on a
plate located on the left front corner of the instrument
panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield. This number also is stamped into the right
front body, behind the right front seat. Move the right
front seat forward to allow better viewing of the stamped
VIN. This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your
VIN Location
INTRODUCTION 9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Right Front Body VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .15 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .19
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .26
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .26
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .49
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .28
▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .67
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .109
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Keyless Push Button Ignition
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote
transmitter and a Keyless Push Button Ignition.
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger
compartment.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate
feature (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things To when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further informa- ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
tion).
RUN will illuminate.
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
push to operate the ignition switch.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
The emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You
can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
2
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Key Fob
Upon opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in
ACC or ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the
chime, the ignition or accessory on message will display
in the cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect® system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from vehicle, place the ignition
in the OFF position and lock all doors when leaving
the vehicle unattended.
SENTRY KEY®
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Push Button
Ignition, and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are
programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine
to crank if an invalid Key Fob is used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible by an authorized dealer.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
• Do not make modifications or alterations to the
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
security protection.
• The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
authorized dealer.
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
Replacement Keys
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
Customer Key Programming
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors,
performed at an authorized dealer.
liftgate, and ignition for unauthorized operation. When
the alarm is activated, the interior switches for door locks
General Information
and power liftgate are disabled. The Vehicle Security
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15 Alarm provides both audio and visual signals, the horn
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is will sound, the headlights will turn on, park lamps,
subject to the following conditions:
and/or turn signals will flash repeatedly for three minutes. If the disturbance is still present (driver’s door,
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
passenger door, other doors, ignition) after three minutes,
• This device must accept any interference that may be the headlights, park lamps, and/or turn signals will flash
received, including interference that may cause unde- for an additional 15 minutes.
sired operation.
NOTE: The Panic and Security alarms are quite different.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the
by the party responsible for compliance could void the Security modes to hear the differences in the horn. In case
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
one should go off in the future, you will need to know
which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙
in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for
further information).
• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF”
position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting
And Operating⬙ for further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™, make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF, Rearming The System
and the key is physically removed from the ignition. If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
vehicle:
• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
rearm itself.
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™, insert a valid key into the ignition switch and
turn the key to the ON position.
NOTE:
• Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
Vehicle Security Alarm.
equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further • The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
information).
power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will
not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
position.
door, the alarm will sound.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
push the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ START/STOP but- • When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
ton (requires at least one valid Key Fob in the
vehicle).
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors — if equipped. Refer to “Mirrors” in
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for furbecomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
ther information.
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times, and the
exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 MPH (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit• The front courtesy overhead console and door courter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in
the “Dome defeat” position (extreme bottom position).
NOTE:
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the power liftgate, or activate the Panic Alarm from
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a
hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE
transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to
activate the system.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Fob
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Flash Lamps With Lock
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The
turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know Before Headlight Illumination On Approach
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the equipped through Uconnect®. To change the current
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under- Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated,
the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off,
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitand the interior lights will turn on.
ter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights
will flash, and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a
signal.
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
(24 km/h) or greater.
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE:
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
• The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
horn will remain on.
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your • You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
Instrument Panel” for further information.
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
Using The Panic Alarm
by the system.
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
Sound Horn With Lock
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Used batteries are harmful to the environment. You
can dispose of them either in the correct containers as
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
specified by law or by taking them to a Dealership,
performed at an authorized dealer.
which will deal with their disposal.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
housing or the printed circuit board.
battery.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
NOTE:
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
other hand.
Batteries could contain dangerous materials. Please
Programming Additional Transmitters
dispose of them according to respect for environment 2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
and local laws.
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
the seal during removal.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
Separating RKE Transmitter Case
• This device must accept any interference received,
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
including interference that may cause undesired op(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
eration.
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery by the party responsible for compliance could void the
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal NOTE:
distance, check for these two conditions:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter
may reduce this range.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
How To Use Remote Start
radios.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
engine will remote start:
• Shift Lever in PARK
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve- • Doors closed
niently from outside the vehicle while still • Hood closed
maintaining security. The system has a range of
• Liftgate closed
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
WARNING! (Continued)
• RKE PANIC button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
• Ignition in OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Remote Start Abort Message On Driver
vehicle
Information Display (DID) — If Equipped
• Fuel level meets minimum requirement
The following messages will display in the DID if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start premaWARNING!
turely:
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or • Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon • Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in- • Remote Start Aborted — Liftgate Ajar
jury or death when inhaled.
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
(Continued)
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The DID message stays active until the ignition is turned • For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
to the ON/RUN position.
in the Remote Start mode.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
• The engine can be started two consecutive times with
the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be
Push and release the REMOTE START button
cycled by pushing the START/STOP button twice (or
on the RKE transmitter twice within five secthe ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
onds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking
position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a
lights will flash, and the horn will chirp twice
third cycle.
(if programmed). Then, the engine will start, and the
vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
15-minute cycle.
Vehicle
NOTE:
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds. NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Remote Start mode.
Start request.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, push and release the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
push and release the START/STOP button.
NOTE:
through the duration of Remote Start or until the ignition
switch is cycled to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and deactivated through the Uconnect® SETTINGS. For more information on Remote Start Comfort
System operation, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Multimedia.”
DOOR LOCKS
• For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
feature, the message “Remote Start Active — Push Manual Door Locks
Start Button” will display in the DID until you push The power door locks can be manually locked from
the START button.
inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To lock
each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
When Remote Start is activated, the heated steering
inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver
upward. If the lock knob is down when the door is
vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the
closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is
remote start is activated. These features will stay on
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go ™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Manual Door Lock Knob
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
(Continued)
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switch is located on each front door
panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock the doors.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside
the vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door
may be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 MPH (24 km/h).
Auto door lock feature is enabled/Desabled in the
Uconnect Settings sections in the radio. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” located in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel.”
Power Door Lock Switch
Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature — If Equipped
If the lock knob is down when the door is closed, the door If Auto Unlock is enabled, this feature will unlock all the
will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is not inside doors when any door is opened if the vehicle is stopped
and in PARK. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Underthe vehicle before closing the door.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If you push the door lock switch while the ignition
position is in ACC or ON/RUN and the driver or front
passenger’s door is open, the doors will not lock.
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the
window, and open the door with the outside door
handle.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
push the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
goes ajar within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock,
and if equipped, will arm the security alarm.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed,
door is unlocked.
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s
front door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature, which will function if the ignition is OFF.
If one of the vehicle doors is open, and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed, the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
(on the third attempt, ALL doors will lock, and the
Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the
vehicle).
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate handle. With a valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the
electronic liftgate handle for a power open on vehicles
equipped with Power Liftgate. Push the electronic liftgate handle and lift for Manual Liftgate vehicles.
NOTE: If the vehicle is unlocked, the liftgate will open
with the handle and no RKE Transmitter is required.
Passive Entry/Lock Button Location
1 — Electronic Release Switch
2 — Lock Button Location
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the passive entry lock button
located to the right of electronic liftgate handle.
2
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in
Uconnect® Settings, all doors will unlock when you push
the button on the liftgate. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press⬙ is programmed in Uconnect® Settings, the liftgate
will unlock when you push the button on the liftgate. For
further information, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel.”
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handle, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors and liftgate.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling
the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
WINDOWS
Power Windows
2
The power window controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front
passenger door/rear doors which operates the front
passenger/rear passenger door windows. The window
controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN or ACC position.
Power Window Switches
The power window switches remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF.
Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switches
have an “Auto-Down” feature. Push the window switch
past the first detent, release, and the window will go
down automatically. To cancel the “Auto-Down” movement, operate the switch in either the up or down
direction and release the switch.
To open the window part way, push to the first detent
and release it when you want the window to stop.
Auto-Down Window Switches
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection —
Driver And Front Passenger Door Only
Lift the window switch fully upward to the second
detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
To stop the window from going all the way up during the NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during
“Auto Up” operation, push down on the switch briefly. “Auto Up,” it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
again to close the window. Any impact due to rough road
the first detent and release when you want the window to
conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexstop.
pectedly during “Auto-Up.” If this happens, pull the
switch lightly to the first detent and hold it to close the
window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Auto-Up Window Switches
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Resetting The Auto Up Feature
Should the “Auto Up” feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset “Auto Up”:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Button
Window Lockout Button
The Window Lockout button on the driver’s door allows Wind Buffeting
you to disable the window controls on the rear doors. To Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
disable the window controls on the rear doors, push the pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
Window Lockout button. To enable the window controls, ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
push the Window Lockout button again.
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
LIFTGATE
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in
Uconnect® Settings, all doors will unlock when you push
the button on the liftgate. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press⬙ is programmed in Uconnect® Settings, the liftgate
will unlock when you push the button on the liftgate. For
further information, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel.”
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the (1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the passive entry lock button
electronic liftgate handle. With a valid Passive Entry RKE located to the right of electronic liftgate handle.
transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the
electronic liftgate handle to open with one fluid motion. NOTE: The liftgate passive entry lock button will only
lock the liftgate; the liftgate unlock feature is built into
the electronic liftgate handle.
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
Passive Entry/Lock Button Location
1 — Electronic Release Switch
2 — Lock Button Location
The power liftgate may be opened by pushing
the electronic liftgate release located handle
(refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” located in
“Things To Know Before Starting”) or by pushing the LIFTGATE button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter. Push the LIFTGATE button on the
RKE transmitter twice within five seconds to open the
power liftgate. Once the liftgate is open, pushing the
button twice within five seconds a second time will close
the liftgate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by NOTE:
pushing the LIFTGATE button located on the front
• In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an
overhead console, or closed by pushing the LIFTGATE
emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open
button located on left rear trim panel, near the liftgate
the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be
opening. Pushing the LIFTGATE button located on left
accessed through a snap-in cover located on the liftrear trim panel once will close the liftgate only. This
gate trim panel.
button cannot be used to open the liftgate.
• If the liftgate is left open for an extended period of
When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter is
time, the liftgate may need to be closed manually to
pushed two times, the turn signals will flash twice to
reset power liftgate functionality.
signal that the liftgate is preparing open or close (if Flash
Lamps with Lock is enabled in the Uconnect® Settings)
WARNING!
and the liftgate chime (Selectable in Uconnect® Settings)
will be audible. For further information, refer to During power operation, personal injury or cargo
⬙Uconnect® Settings⬙ in ⬙Understanding Your Instrument damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
Panel.”
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The power liftgate must be in the full open position for
rear liftgate close button on the left rear trim, near the
The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the
liftgate opening, to operate. If the liftgate is not fully
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 MPH
open, push the Liftgate button on the Key Fob to fully
(0 km/h).
open the liftgate, and then push it again to close.
The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
• If the liftgate handle switch is pushed while the power
below −22°F (−30°C) or temperatures above 150°F
liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the full
(65°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
open position.
from the liftgate before pushing any of the power
liftgate switches.
• If the liftgate handle switch is pushed while the power
liftgate is opening, the liftgate motor will disengage to
If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
allow manual operation.
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it • If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
meets sufficient resistance.
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manuThere are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
ally.
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips
will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
• If your liftgate is power closing and you put the
vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue to power
NOTE:
•
•
•
•
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
close. However, vehicle movement may result in a • Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
detection of an obstruction.
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Seat Belt Systems
• Child Restraints
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child
between occupants and the door and occupants could
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chilbe injured.
dren who do not use child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the
driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbelted,
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled.
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h) by blinking the Seat Belt
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of duration or until the respective seat belts are buckled.
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are buckled. The driver should instruct all other occube belted at all times.
pants to buckle their seat belts. If an outboard front seat
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than
(BeltAlert)
5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert will provide both audio and
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver visual notification.
and outboard front passenger (if equipped with out- The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
board front passenger BeltAlert) to buckle their seat when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition
Seat Belt Systems
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy
object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the
driver’s or outboard front passenger’s (if equipped with
BeltAlert) seat belt remains unbuckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
(Continued)
(Continued)
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Positioning The Lap Belt
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortslack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed
the latch plate.
position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
shoulder belt.
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
anchor point.
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
and move it up or down to the position that serves you
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180
best.
degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above
the latch plate.
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts worn snugly and positioned properly.
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re- Restraints” section of this manual. The table below
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten- defines the type of feature for each seating position.
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) — If Equipped
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
60/40 Second Row (7 passenger)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
Captains Chairs Second Row (6 Passenger)
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
(Continued)
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
These head restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
However, if during a front impact, a secondary rear
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severwhether the severity, or type of rear impact will require ity and type of the impact.
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle.”
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Head Restraint Front Half (Soft Foam and Trim)
Seatback
Head Restraint Back Half (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
Head Restraint Guide Tubes
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
front passenger’s seat before driving. You can recognize
when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the
fact that they have moved forward (as shown in step
three of the resetting procedure).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
2
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
a comfortable position.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
AHR In Reset Position
Review Table Below
A — Downward Movement
B — Rearward Movement
C — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
NOTE:
• If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active
Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock
• For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
into the back decorative plastic half.
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
• Seat Belt Pretenioners
Air Bag System Components
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag • Seat Track Position Sensors
system components:
Advanced Front Air Bags
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
• Air Bag Warning Light
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
• Steering Wheel and Column
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
• Instrument Panel
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
• Knee Impact Bolsters
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
• Advanced Front Air Bags
the air bag covers.
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air
Bag
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel,
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bags to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
(Continued)
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
severe initial deceleration.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Knee Impact Bolsters
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
Advanced Front Air Bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG”
label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure you
if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
during certain side impact and certain rollover events, in
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
seat belts and body structure.
“AIRBAG.”
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head injury to front
and rear seat outboard occupants. SABICs may reduce
the risk of injuries in certain side impact and vehicle
rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure you if you are not
belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in
the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path
are located should remain free from any obstructions.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the
Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
Front Air Bags deploy.
faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners as well as the SABs and SABICs on both sides of
the vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy
the seat belt pretensioners, with or without the SABs and
SABICs, on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle
experiences a near rollover event.
Rollover Events
If A Deployment Occurs
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. or all of the following may occur:
The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover
event may be in progress and whether deployment is • The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric- Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have detion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by bags will not be in place to protect you.
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
WARNING!
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immeprocess that generates the non-toxic gas used for air diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the System serviced as well.
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or NOTE:
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
but they will open during air bag deployment.
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
structions for cleaning.
authorized dealer immediately.
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Accident Response System
System Reset Procedure
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition
OFF.
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” position.
Air Bag Warning Light
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your
protection in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as with air bag system electrical components.
the battery has power or until the ignition switch is
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
turned to the “OFF” position.
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
• Unlock the doors automatically.
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in
the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or dealer service the air bag system immediately.
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
eight-second interval.
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
remains on while driving.
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
again after initial startup.
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc- the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection is detected that could affect the air bag system. The tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. system immediately.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in
the on position, and stays on after you start the
vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
(Continued)
(Continued)
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
WARNING! (Continued)
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children.
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in proper
restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
There are different sizes and types of restraints for NOTE:
children from newborn size to the child almost large
• For
additional
information,
refer
to
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–732–8243.
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the • Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canainstructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
da’s website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafetyrestraint.
index-53.htm
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and
Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child restraint
Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the
vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
child seat.
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
WARNING!
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
Infants And Child Restraints
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear support
leg in this vehicle. The floor of this vehicle is not
designed to manage the crash forces of this type of car
seat. In a crash, the support leg may not function as it
was designed by the car seat manufacturer, and your
child may be more severely injured as a result.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
way back?
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
WARNING!
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors
Tether Anchor
Only
+ Top Tether
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
2
Captains Chairs Second Row (6 Passenger)
•
•
60/40 Second Row (7 Passenger)
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the
child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint?
No
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower
anchorages?
N/A — 6 Passenger
No — 7 Passenger
Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use
the LATCH anchorage system to attach a
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
7 Passenger: Use the seat belt and tether
anchor to install a child seat in the center
seating position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Can the head restraints be removed?
No — 6 Passenger
Yes — 7 Passenger
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to
install a child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the LATCH
anchorages in an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See
your child restraint owner’s manual for
more information.
7 Passenger: Only the head restraint in
the center position may be removed.
2
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Rear Seat Lower Anchorages
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
Locating Tether Anchorages — 2nd Row
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat.
2
Top Tether Strap Mounting (Captain’s Chair)
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating Tether Anchorages — 3rd Row
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat. To access them, pull the carpeted floor
panel away from the seat back, this will expose
the top tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH:
WARNING!
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
• Do not install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH system. This position is not
approved for installing child seats using the
LATCH attachments. You must use the seat belt
and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center
seating position.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System”
for typical installation instructions.
2
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
Center Arm Rest Tether
For rear-facing child restraints secured in the center seat
position with the vehicle seat belts, the rear center seat
position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in
the upward position.
1. To access the center seat arm rest tether, first lower the
arm rest. The tether is located behind the armrest and
hooked onto the plastic seat backing.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic
seat backing.
3. Raise the armrest and attach the tether hook to the
strap located on the front of the arm rest.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Attached
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manumove it to its rear-most position to make room for the
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
to allow more room for the child seat.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seatIf the selected seating position has a Switchable Autoing position.
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
2
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.”
2
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Captains Chairs Second Row (6 Passenger)
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
60/40 Second Row (7 passenger)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger seat?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Can the head restraints be removed?
No — 6 Passenger
Yes — 7 Passenger
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
No
Yes
Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is
allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
7 Passenger: Only the head restraint in the center position may
be removed.
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR retractor.
2
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webrear-most position to make room for the child seat.
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
vehicle seat.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
“click.”
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
against the child seat.
attach a tether anchor.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
2
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move
the child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
2. To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the
rear seat, pull the carpeted floor panel away from the
seat back, this will expose the top tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
4. For the center seating position, route the tether strap
over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to
the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located on Seatback)
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
2
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Top Tether Strap Mounting (60/40 Seat)
Top Tether Strap Mounting (Captain’s Chair)
6. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
WARNING!
• The top tether anchorages are not visible until the
gap panel is folded down. Do not use the visible
cargo tie down hooks, located on the floor behind
the seats, to attach a child restraint tether anchor.
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
2
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as a problem.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle.”
SAFETY TIPS
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
2
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)
112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
system.
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
system.
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, Air Bag Warning Light
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
The light should come on and remain on for
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113
not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the
light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to
prevent them from moving and interfering with the
pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
(Continued)
2
114 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
Tires
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects should be located and corrected immediately.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . .122
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .123
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . .129
▫ Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .131
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
▫ Sun Visor Extension — If Equipped . . . . . . . .132
䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
▫ Rear Cross Path (RCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
▫ Rear Captain Chairs — If Equipped. . . . . . . . .161
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ Folding Third Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . .144 䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .165
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .145
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .167
▫ Manual Front Passenger Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
▫ Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —
Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature — If
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . .
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . .151
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . .
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
▫ Headlights On Automatically With Wipers
▫ 60/40 Split Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
. . .170
. . .171
. . .172
. . .172
. . .174
. . .174
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
▫ Automatic High Beam — If Equipped . . . . . .174
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .175
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
▫ Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ High/Low Beam Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
▫ Parking Lights And Panel Lights. . . . . . . . . . .176 䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .183
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ Windshield Washer Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . .185
▫ Battery Saver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .179
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .187
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .188
▫ Ambient Light — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .181 䡵 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED . . .191
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .199
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .200
▫ To Activate/Deactivate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .206
▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
▫ ACC Operation At Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .211
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .212
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .215
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
䡵 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .224
▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .235
▫ Turning FCW ON Or OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
▫ Changing FCW And Active Braking Status. . . .227
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .235
䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
▫ FCW Limited Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
▫ Service FCW Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .240
䡵 PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .234
▫ Sunglasses Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .242
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .244
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .247
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .248
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ Using HomeLink®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
▫ Ignition OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251 䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .259
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .251 䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .253
▫ Rear Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .253
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ Front Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ Rear Full Center Console — If Equipped . . . . .265
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
▫ Rear Mini Center Console — If Equipped . . . .268 䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ Rechargeable Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Cargo Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . .275
▫ Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped . .271
▫ Deploying the Crossbars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
▫ Cargo Tie-Down Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
▫ Stowing The Crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
Outside
Mirrors
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield). To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side
mirror.
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear
view viewing.
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned
On or Off through the touchscreen.
• Push the Mirror Dimmer button once to turn the
feature On.
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is • Push the Mirror Dimmer button a second time to turn
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windthe feature Off.
shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The ASSIST and 9–1–1 features operate through
the Uconnect® Access service. These buttons will only
operate as long as your Uconnect® Access service is
active. Refer to your “Uconnect® System supplement
manual” for further information.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just push the Assist button and you’ll be connected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance
Automatic Dimming Mirror
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
a 9-1-1 button.
• Uconnect® Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for Uconnect® Access and Uconnect® Access Via
Mobile features.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other 3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1
vehicle issues.
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1
9-1-1 Call
operator:
1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
• The vehicle brand.
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the 4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator
Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
Phone Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn off
additional help is needed.
the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the Assist and 9-1-1
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operator may be able to open a voice connection with the
vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once
the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection with the
vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator should be able to
speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear
sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call
system will attempt to remain connected with the 9-1-1
operator until the 9-1-1 operator terminates the connection.
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
WARNING! (Continued)
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,
AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the Assist
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated
red.
• The Phone Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle phone
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
(Continued)
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
if a malfunction in any part of the system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag system may not be working
properly and the 9-1-1 system may not be able to
send a signal to a 9-1-1 operator. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the ORC system immediately.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.
• Wireless and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals
are unavailable or obstructed.
• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the • Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not
• Wireless network congestion.
limited to, the following factors:
• Weather.
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
NOTE: Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
wireless and GPS antennas. You could prevent wireless
and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle
from placing an emergency call. Wireless and GPS signal
reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function
properly.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions:
• Full forward position
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved • Full rearward position
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
• Normal position
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The Drivers side mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror. The mirrors will
automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
mirror adjusts.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s side
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
Power Mirror Switch
mirror, push the mirror select button for the mirror that
1 — Mirror Direction Control
you want to adjust. Using the mirror control switch, push 2 — Mirror Selection
on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. Outside mirrors will
move slightly downward from the present position when
the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will
then return to the original position when the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored memory
setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse
position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned
on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
Sun Visor Extension — If Equipped
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of This feature has a pull out extension on the sun visor for
the visors.
increased coverage.
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
automatically.
EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
on both sides of the vehicle (12 ft or 3.8 m). The zone
length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on
both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed has
reached approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and
will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
Rear Detection Zones
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
be momentarily illuminated in both outside rear view
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operaverify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
tional. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
mode when the vehicle is in PARK.
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
BSM warning light remaining illuminated or the alert
chime remaining on the entire time the vehicle is in a
forward gear. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
Sensor Location (Left Side Shown)
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
3
BSM Warning Light
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (Side, Rear, Front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Side Monitoring
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Entering From The Rear
Overtaking Traffic
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative of less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking/Approaching
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
3
Overtaking/Passing
Stationary Objects
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes.
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicles
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
(Continued)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and deUconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/
tected object are present on the same side at the same
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
be reduced.
Modes Of Operation
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM NOTE:
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
system, the radio volume is reduced.
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts • If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
the appropriate visual alert only.
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio volume is reduced.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
volume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the approthe RCP state always requests the chime.
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opWhen the BSM system is turned off there will be no
eration of the device.
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
systems.
other than an authorized service facility could void
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
authorization to use this equipment.
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and SEATS
used.
Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
General Information
vehicle.
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
WARNING!
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
Blind Spot Alert Off
(Continued)
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
driver and front passenger seats. The power seat switches
Power Seat Switches
are located on the outboard side of the seat. There are two
switches that control the movement of the seat cushion 1 — Seatback Switch
and the seatback.
2 — Seat Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
Reclining The Seatback
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch. The front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
(Continued)
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped
Some models are equipped with a six-way power passenger seat. The power seat switch is located on the
outboard side of the seat. The switch is used to control
the movement of the seat and seat cushion.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch. The front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on
the switch will raise and lower the position of the
support.
3
Power Lumbar Switch
Manual Front Passenger Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
Some models may be equipped with a manual front
passenger seat. The passenger seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a bar located by the front of
the seat cushion, near the floor.
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Adjustment Bar
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under
the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —
Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature — If
Equipped
To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor position, lift the
recline lever and push the seatback forward. To return to
the seating position, raise the seatback and lock it into
place.
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Fold-Flat Passenger Seat
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Seats — If Equipped
WARNING! (Continued)
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions and
seat backs.
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
Front Heated Seats
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
(Continued)
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. The
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
LO and none for OFF.
• Press the heated seat button
setting ON.
once to turn the HI
• Press the heated seat button
the LO setting ON.
a second time to turn
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
• Press the heated seat button
the heating elements OFF.
a third time to turn Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated seats can be programed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect®
system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the two rear outboard seats may be
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within equipped with heated seats. There are two heated seat
two to five minutes.
switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to seats independently. The heated seat switches for each
heater are located on the rear of the center console.
operate.
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Push the switch once to select HI-level heating.
Push the switch a second time to select LOlevel heating. Push the switch a third time to
shut the heating elements OFF.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two
Rear Heated Seat Switches
to one, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
LO and none for OFF.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment and move
air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help
keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher
ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds,
HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the
control buttons through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
once to choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button
choose LO.
a second time to
• Press the ventilated seat button
turn the ventilated seat OFF.
a third time to
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate. Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect®
system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Head Restraints
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rearimpact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The Active Head Restraints
(AHR) will be split in two halves, with the front half
being soft foam and trim, the back half being decorative
plastic.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to reduce the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is design to reduce the risk of injury to the
driver or front passenger in certain types of rear impacts.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
3
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
Adjustment Button
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured,
as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this
warning could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
Head Restraints — Rear Seats
WARNING!
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjustable. They automatically fold forward when the rear seat
is folded to a load floor position but do not return to their
normal position when the rear seat is raised. After
returning either seat to its upright position, raise the head
restraint until it locks in place. The outboard head
restraints are not removable.
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The center head restraint has limited adjustment. Lift
upward on the head restraint to raise it, or push downward on the head restraint to lower it.
WARNING!
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
position could result in serious injury or death in a
collision. Always make sure the outboard head restraints are in their upright positions when the seat is
to be occupied.
NOTE: For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Head Restraint
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
Power Folding Third Row Head Restraints
60/40 Split Rear Seat
For improved visibility when in reverse, the third row Fold-Flat
head restraints can be folded using the Uconnect® SysThe second row seats can be folded flat to carry cargo.
tem.
Pull upward on the release lever located on the outboard
Press the “Controls” button located on the bottom of the
side of the seat.
Uconnect® display.
Press the Headrest Fold button
third row head restraints.
to power fold the
NOTE:
• The head restraints can only be folded downward
using the Headrest button. The head restraints must be
raised manually when occupying the third row.
• Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the third
row seats.
Release Lever
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Easy Access For Third Row
Either side of the rear seat can be tumbled forward to
allow passengers to easily access the third row seats.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
Fold-Flat Second Row Seat
Release Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
2. Tumble the seat forward using the pull strap located
behind the seatback.
3
Tumbled Second Row
Tumble Strap
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the second row seats in
the tumbled position. The second row seats are only
intended to be tumbled for entry and exit to the third
row seat. Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury.
To Raise Rear Seat
Tumbled the seat rearward and lock it into place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
Rear Captain Chairs — If Equipped
Fold-Flat
The second row seats can be folded flat to carry cargo.
3
Pull upward on the release lever located on the outboard
side of the seat.
Fold-Flat Second Row Seats
Release Lever
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Tumble the seat forward using the pull strap located
behind the seatback.
Either side of the rear seat can be tumbled forward to
allow passengers to easily access the third row seats.
Easy Access For Third Row
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
Tumble Strap
Release Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the second row seats in
the tumbled position. The second row seats are only
intended to be tumbled for entry and exit to the third
row seat. Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury.
3
3. If your vehicle is equipped with a mini console there is
a stepping pad to allow passengers to easily access the
third row seats.
Mini Console Stepping Pad
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Raise Rear Seat
Tumbled the seat rearward and lock it into place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Folding Third Row
Both third row seats can be folded forward to increase the
cargo area. To lower either seat pull on the release handle
located on back of the seat and lower the seat using the
pull strap located next to the release handle.
Release Handles
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
Third Row Folded
settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, adjustable
NOTE: The second row seats must be in their full upright
pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steerposition, or tumbled when folding the third row seats.
ing column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio
To raise the seat, pull the seat toward you using the strap station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) translocated on the back of the seat.
mitter can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pushed.
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmitters, one RKE transmitter can be linked to memory
position 1 and the other transmitter can be linked to
memory position 2.
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons:
• The (S) button, which is used to activate the memory
save function.
• The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either
of two pre-programmed memory profiles.
Memory Seat Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The Driver Information
NOTE: To create a new memory profile, perform the
Display (DID) will display which memory position
following:
has been set.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
1. Insert the ignition key fob, and turn the ignition switch
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
to the ON/RUN position.
ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if
equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column
equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column
[if equipped], and radio station presets).
[if equipped], and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the S (Set) button on the memory
3. Push and release the S (Set) button on the memory
switch.
switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The Driver Information
Display (DID) will display which memory position
has been set.
Programming The Memory Feature
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you
must select the “Memory To FOB” feature through the
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings ”
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
memory profile.
information.
• The Recall Memory with the “Memory To FOB” fea- To program your RKE transmitters, perform the followture can be enabled through the Uconnect® system ing:
screen. Refer to “Customer- Programmable Features —
Uconnect® Access 8.4 Settings ” in “Understanding 1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF position.
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
2. Select a desired memory profile (1) or (2).
NOTE:
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set,
refer to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ in this
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one section for instructions on how to set a memory profile.
of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pushng the
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
the SET (S) button on the memory switch.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
4. Within five seconds, push and release button (1) or (2) Driver One Memory Position Recall
accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
in the instrument cluster.
memory switch, push MEMORY button number 1 on
the memory switch.
5. Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter within 10 seconds.
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
RKE transmitter, push the UNLOCK button on the
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your
RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.
memory settings by pushing the SET (S) button, and
within 10 seconds, followed by pushing the UNLOCK
Driver Two Memory Position Recall
button on the RKE transmitter.
• To recall the memory setting for driver two using the
Memory Position Recall
memory switch, push MEMORY button number 2 on
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
the memory switch.
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
• To recall the memory settings for driver two using the
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Driver
RKE transmitter, push the UNLOCK button on the
Information Display (DID).
RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the MEMORY
buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2). When a recall is
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
cancelled, the driver’s seat, and the power pedals (if
equipped) stop moving. A delay of one second will occur
before another recall can be selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the
Key Fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF,
for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™).
• When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™), the driver seat will move
about 2.4 in (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat
position is greater than or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its
previously set position when you place the ignition
into the ACC or RUN position.
• When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™), the driver seat will move to a
position 0.3 in (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the
driver seat position is between 0.9 in and 2.7 in (22.7
mm and 67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat
will return to its previously set position when you
place the ignition to the ACC or RUN position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
or Easy Entry.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
the programmable features in the Uconnect® system.
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
3
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
Hood Release
1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument 2. Reach under the hood from outside the vehicle, move
the safety latch to the left and lift the hood.
panel and in front of the driver’s door.
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
Safety Latch Location
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center
of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The headlight switch controls the operation of the headlights,
parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and
fog lights (if equipped).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and
fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic
is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
• To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
Headlight Switch
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is
on the parking lights, taillights, license plate
light and instrument panel lights are also
turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch back to the O (Off) position.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
through the Uconnect® system. Refer to “Uconnect®
Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in “UnderThis system automatically turns the headlights on or off
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the NOTE: When your headlights come on during the dayAUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight time, the vehicle will monitor outside brightness and
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights decide if the instrument panel needs to be dimmed or
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the not. Refer to “Lights” in this section for further informaignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic tion.
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped
position.
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
provides increased forward lighting at night by automatwill come on in the automatic mode.
ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches
also has this customer-programmable feature. When from high beams to low beams until the approaching
your headlights are in the automatic mode and the vehicle is out of view.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
engine is running, they will automatically turn on when
the wiper system is on. This feature is programmable
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
dealer.
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your InstruDaytime Running Lights — If Equipped
ment Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
• To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitivity Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam
Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle highbeam lever 6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of
ignition ON. System will return to default setting upon
ignition off.
The Daytime Running Lights come on whenever the
engine is running, and the transmission is not in the
PARK position. The lights will remain on until the
ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the
parking brake is engaged. The headlight switch must be
used for normal nighttime driving.
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System, refer
to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlight Delay
Fog Lights — If Equipped
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for switch to the parking light or headlight position and
approximately 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when pushing in the headlight rotary control.
the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is
on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight
delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight
switch on then off, or by turning the ignition ON.
NOTE: The headlight delay time is programmable
through the Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect®
Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
To turn on the parking lights and instrument
Fog Light Operation
panel lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise.
To turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights
are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam.
back to the O (Off) position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
equipped with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and the
UNLOCK button is pushed on the RKE transmitter, the
courtesy and dome lights will turn on. When a door is
open and the interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer
control all the way down, to the OFF detent, will cause all
the interior lights to go out. This is also known as the
Interior Lights
“Party” mode because it allows the doors to stay open for
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front extended periods of time without discharging the vehidoors are opened or when the dimmer control (rotating cle’s battery.
wheel on the right side of the headlight switch) is rotated
to the its farthest upward position. If your vehicle is
An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will
illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will
turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when
the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the
high beam is selected.
3
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odometer, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
to its farthest position up until you hear a click. This
feature is termed the “Parade” mode and is useful when
headlights are required during the day.
Dimmer Control
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on
after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
the driver’s door is opened.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
Battery Saver
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overis provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
head console.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10
minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up
to the dome ON position for 10 minutes, the interior
lights will automatically turn off.
3
NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled
OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after
eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on
for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
Front Map/Reading Lights
Each light can be turned on by pushing a switch on either
side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night
time visibility. To turn the lights off, push the switch a
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
second time. The lights will also turn on when the Courtesy Lights
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top
pushed.
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a
second time.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Courtesy Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
Ambient Light — If Equipped
Multifunction Lever
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibil- steering column.
ity of the floor and center console area.
Multifunction Lever
Ambient Light
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signals
Lane Change Assist
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. three times then automatically turn off.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a turn
signal is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp will turn
off on the side of the vehicle in which the turn signal is
flashing. The Daytime Running Lamp will turn back on
when the turn signal is turned off.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beam. Pulling the
multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn
the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch,
located on the end of the lever. For information on the
rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
3
Multifunction Lever
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper
operation.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving
speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second
(fourth detent).
Windshield Wiper Operation
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the
wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles
after the end of the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
3
Intermittent Wiper Operation
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, push on the end of the lever (toward
the steering wheel) and hold while spray is desired. If the
Windshield Washer Operation
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
the off position, the wipers will operate for several wipe pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
cycles, then turn off.
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Rotate the end
of the lever downward to the Mist position and release
for a single wiping cycle.
Mist Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windThis feature senses moisture on the windshield and
shield.
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray • Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
to activate this feature.
using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect®
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
for further information.
sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
sensitive. Setting three should be used for normal rain
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
conditions. Settings one and two can be used if the driver
following conditions:
desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting four can be used if
the driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch • Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
in the OFF position when not using the system.
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
NOTE:
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
3
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission is in
the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will
not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift
lever/gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL
position.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed
the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing
wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and
no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
steering column lever is located below the multifunction
lever on the steering column.
3
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel
to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to preprogrammed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in this section for further information.
WARNING!
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps steering wheel to operate.
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up On models that are equipped with remote start, the
to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn during a remote start through the Uconnect® system.
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
on when the steering wheel is already warm.
Instrument Panel” for further information.
The heated steering wheel control button is located
WARNING!
within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the
control button through the climate screen or the controls • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
screen.
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhausonce to
• Press the heated steering wheel button
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
turn the heating element ON.
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
• Press the heated steering wheel button
a second
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for
time to turn the heating element OFF.
long periods.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
(Continued)
3
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
2 — SET+/ACCEL
3 — RESUME
4 — SET-/DECEL
5 — CANCEL
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Activate
To Set A Desired Speed
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed
control. CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is on. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a
second time. CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-)
button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has
been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH
(km/h) will appear indicating what speed was set. A
CRUISE indicator lamp, along with set speed will also
appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when the
speed is set.
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “UnderA soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control withspeed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
out erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition U.S. Speed (mph)
To Deactivate
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
the new set speed will be established.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET + button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
Metric Speed (km/h)
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de- • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
crease speed by pushing the SET - button.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under- • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
the new set speed will be established.
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
moderate hills is normal.
EQUIPPED
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
Control.
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
Electronic Speed Control function performs differently.
Please refer to the proper section within this chapter.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in • Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a
Control Mode” in this section.
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control
NOTE:
will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of
the mode selected.
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
Always confirm which mode is selected.
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
WARNING!
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
the vehicle ahead.
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibil• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
ity to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
appropriate distance between vehicles.
(Continued)
3
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle
for 2 seconds in the stop position. If the target
vehicle does not start moving within two seconds
the ACC system will display a message that the
system will release the brakes and that the
brakes must be applied manually. An audible
chime will sound when the brakes are released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
(Continued)
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
WARNING! (Continued)
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
3
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
— NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
— SET+/ACCEL
— RESUME
— SET-/DECEL
— DISTANCE SETTING — INCREASE
— ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF
— DISTANCE SETTING — DECREASE
— CANCEL
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive conditions:
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
• When you apply the brakes.
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
• When the parking brake is set.
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph • When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state, • When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
the Driver Information Display (DID) displays “ACC • When the brakes are overheated.
Ready.”
• When the driver door is open.
When the system is OFF, the DID displays “Adaptive
• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the DID displays
“ACC Ready.”
time, the system will turn off and the DID will display
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
3
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have a collision.
Always leave the system off when you are not using
it.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the DID.
• The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
speed will only be determined by the position of the
SET + button or the SET - button and release. The DID
accelerator pedal.
will display the set speed.
To Cancel
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to The following conditions cancel the system:
20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle • The brake pedal is applied.
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
the current speed of the vehicle.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
• The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the • The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pushed.
Drive position.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys- • The ignition is turned OFF.
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
To Resume
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume)
• Driver door is opened at low speeds.
• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The DID will display the last set speed.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
force will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply
memory if:
the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
To Turn Off
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button • ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
is pushed.
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
3
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
in the DID.
pushing the SET + button.
To Increase Speed
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
Metric Speed (km/h)
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is rebutton is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the DID.
flected in the DID.
To Decrease Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
pushing the SET - button.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under- • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
button is released. The decrease in set speed is respeed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
flected in the DID.
3
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• When you override and push the SET + button or SET
- buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed
of the vehicle.
• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
• The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, the host vehicle
will release the vehicle brakes two seconds after coming to a full stop.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the
ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the DID.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
3
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Set- • The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ting — Decrease button and release. Each time the button
ACC Activation).
is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how(shorter).
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the necessary.
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
same lane, the DID displays the “Sensed Vehicle IndicaACC system applies the brakes.
tor” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
speed.
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
“BRAKE” will flash in the DID and a chime will sound
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
speed.
capacity.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.
3
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration
up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle.
This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver
utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when
passing on the left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill
while following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts
moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
Brake Alert
standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the
NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the DID is a warning for need for any driver action.
the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean
that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC
the brakes autonomously.
with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
A cancel message will display on the DID and produce a Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
warning chime. Driver intervention will be required at The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The
this moment.
DID is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a information it displays depends on ACC system status.
standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
door is opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
and the brakes will release. A cancel message will display the following displays in the DID:
on the DID and produce a warning chime. Driver interAdaptive Cruise Control Off
vention will be required at this moment.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
3
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering Display Warnings And Maintenance
wheel) and the following will display in the DID:
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
ACC SET
Warning
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when
instrument cluster.
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following: This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
• System Cancel
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,
• Driver Override
dirt or ice. In these cases, the DID will display “ACC/
FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and the
• System Off
system will deactivate.
• ACC Proximity Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
• ACC Unavailable Warning
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
• The DID will return to the last display selected after
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
five seconds of no ACC display activity
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when • Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar • If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
Control is still available. For additional information refer
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
section.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
malfunction.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
vehicle behind the lower grille.
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor- simply reactivating it.
tant to note the following maintenance items:
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
the sensor lens.
3
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and
fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the DID will
• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
Windshield” and the system will have degraded perforonce on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
mance.
other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
your authorized dealer.
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an afterdriving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW
market grille or modifying the grille is not recomsystem will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking
ACC/FCW operation.
any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may
temporarily occur.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
NOTE:
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will
indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded due to
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
When the condition that created limited functionality is normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable.
no longer present, the system will return to full function- If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an
ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see your authoality.
rized dealer.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more Precautions While Driving With ACC
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectfacing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
Service ACC/FCW Warning
intervene.
If the system turns off, and the DID displays “ACC/FCW Towing A Trailer
Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavail- Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
able Service Required”, there may be an internal system
fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
3
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume Using ACC On Hills
your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
system functionality.
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited. conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
ACC Hill Example
3
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
Narrow Vehicles
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
3
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency Mode
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available
for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed)
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be
operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op- To change between the different control modes, push the
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button
eration of the device.
which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed)
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pushing of the
other than an authorized service facility could void
NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CONauthorization to use this equipment.
TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (changing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic
Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or
SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
Once a speed has been set a message (CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH/KM) will appear indicating what
speed was set. This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET +
button.
3
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the Metric Speed (km/h)
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
U.S. Speed (mph)
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
in the DID display.
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
To Decrease Speed
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the DID display.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Undercontinue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reThe speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
flected in the DID display.
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
To Cancel
U.S. Speed (mph)
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the memory:
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• The brake pedal is applied.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • The CANCEL button is pushed.
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re- • The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
flected in the DID display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
3
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over- • The ignition is turned off.
heated).
• You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
Drive position.
pushed.
To Resume Speed
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
20 mph (32 km/h).
Operation
To Turn Off
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings,
memory if:
visual warnings (within the DID), and may apply a brake
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal
collision. The warnings and limited braking are intended
ON/OFF button is pushed.
to provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or
mitigate the potential collision.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If
the driver does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited
level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
FCW Message
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake When the system determines a collision with the vehicle
in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
force as required.
message will be deactivated.
3
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 5 mph
(8 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such Turning FCW ON Or OFF
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking portion of NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows
FCW will be deactivated until the next ignition cycle. the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should The forward collision button is located on the switch
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the panel below the Uconnect® display.
surroundings. If the vehicle enters 4WD Low Range, To turn the FCW system OFF, push the forward collision
the FCW system will be automatically deactivated.
button once to turn the system OFF (led turns on).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
To turn the FCW system back ON, push the forward Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
collision button again to turn the system ON (led turns The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are
off).
programmable through the Uconnect® System. Refer to
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrufrom warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle ment Panel” for further information.
in front of you.
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting and the
Changing the Active Braking status to “Off” prevents the
system from providing limited autonomous braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision.
Active Braking is the “On” setting, this allows the system
to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you when you are farther away and it applies
limited braking. This gives you the most reaction time to
avoid a possible collision.
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from
one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
3
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
fully available. Once the condition that limited the system performance is no longer present, the system will
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
return to its full performance state. If the problem perdriver after ignition shut down.
sists, see your authorized dealer.
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
Service FCW Warning
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
path of the car, stationary objects that are far away, If the system turns off, and the DID displays:
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or • ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
higher rate of speed.
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
screens.
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
FCW Limited Warning
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If the DID displays “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality”
or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition that limits
FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable
under normal conditions, the active braking may not be
NOTE:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
and above the system’s operating speed, a warning will
appear within the Driver Information Display (DID)
indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to
speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense® System ParkSense® Sensors
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
recommendations.
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
changed to the ON/RUN position.
direction, depending on the location, type and orientaParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever/gear
tion of the obstacle.
selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this
shift lever/gear selector position, the system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
3
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense® Warning Display
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® System. Refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the
DID. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance
between the rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” for
further information.
ParkSense® Display
Park Assist Ready
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the DID will display the a single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on
park assist ready system status.
the obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single arc in the left
and/or right rear region and the system will produce a
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2 second
tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
3
Slow Tone
Single 1/2 Second Tone
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
Arc
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
None
Radio Volume
Reduced
No
None
WARNING ALERTS
79-39 in
39-25 in
(200-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
Single 1/2
Slow
Second Tone
4th Solid
3rd
Solid
Yes
Yes
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Continuous
2nd
Flashing
Yes
1st
Flashing
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio, The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Rear chime volume settings can be selected from the
Customer-Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
3
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
system requires service, the ParkSense® switch LED will
blink momentarily, and then the LED will be ON.
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense® switch.
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
When the ParkSense® switch is pushed to System
disable the system, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for
approximately five seconds. Refer to “Driver
Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
shift lever/gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
system is disabled, the DID will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is
in REVERSE.
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when
ParkSense® is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF when the system is
enabled. If the ParkSense® switch is pushed, and the
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” for
further information. When the shift lever/gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a
faulted condition, the DID will display the ⬙PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE
WIPE
REAR
SENSORS⬙
or
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under
this condition, ParkSense® will not operate.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN- ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
SORS” appears in the Driver Information Display (DID)
NOTE:
make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt • Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system operor other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the
ating properly.
message continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
appears in the DID, see an authorized dealer.
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
• When you turn ParkSense® OFF, the instrument cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” Furthermore, once
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense® is turned OFF, the DID will
display “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
3
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense®
system OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
DID.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
WARNING! (Continued)
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever/gear selector is put into REVERSE. The
image will be displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia
radio display screen along with a caution note to “check
entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After
five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView®
camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear
License plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic
grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after
3
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
shifting out of ⬙REVERSE⬙ unless the forward vehicle
speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is
shifted into ⬙PARK⬙ or the ignition is switched to the OFF
position.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected backup path based on the steering wheel
position. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center
of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a
NOTE: The ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera has prohitch/receiver. ⬙Different colored zones indicate the disgrammable modes of operation that may be selected
tance to the rear of the vehicle.⬙ The following table
through the Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect®
shows the approximate distances for each zone:
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
3
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink®), power liftgate and power sunroof
switches may also be included, if equipped.
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light
can be turned on by pushing the switch on either side of
the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility.
Overhead Console
Front Map/Reading Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
To turn the lights off, push the switch a second time. The
lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is
pushed.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a
second time.
Courtesy Lights
3
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunglasses Bin Door
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close.
HomeLink® replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink® unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the overhead
console, or sunvisor, designate the three different
HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is located above the center button.
Sunglasses Bin Door
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
3
HomeLink® Buttons/Overhead Consoles
HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
NOTE:
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage • Erasing all channels should only be performed when
before you begin programming.
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
system.
Programming A Rolling Code
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink® For programming garage door openers that were manubuttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
indicator flashes.
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator
will flash
slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink® has
received the frequency signal from the hand-held
transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator
light changes from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
3
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next 1.
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
2.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
3.
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
not release the button.
Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
3. Push and hold the Homelink® button you want to (Non-Rolling Code)
program while you push and hold the hand-held To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
transmitter button.
follow these steps:
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
will flash
cator light. The Homelink® indicator
slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink® has 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
received the frequency signal from the hand-held
not release the button.
transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator
light changes from slow to rapid.
3
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
remaining steps.
light in view.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States 3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button,
while you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
several seconds of transmission.
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indiCanadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigcator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transfully trained.
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this 4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
time-out in the same manner.
door may open and close while you are programming.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
door or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program- 3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
follow all remaining steps.
activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, Using HomeLink®
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
To operate, press and release the programmed
erase the channels.
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
programming, plug it back in at this time.
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.,). The handheld transmitter of the device may also be
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
used at any time.
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, Security
follow these steps:
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
not release the button.
erased.
3
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
• Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
WARNING! (Continued)
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety
information or assistance.
General Information
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
two conditions:
visors on the overhead console.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
3
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
Power Sunroof Switch
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
(Continued)
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close.” During Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatithe sunroof.
cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
Open.” During Express Open operation, any movement
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the forward again.
Opening Sunroof — Express
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a Pinch Protect Feature
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
held rearward again.
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obClosing Sunroof — Express
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstrucsecond and the sunroof will close automatically from any tion if this occurs. Next, push the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
3
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result Wind Buffeting
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled. pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
Venting Sunroof — Express
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
Push and release the Vent button within one half second
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurand the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
Sunshade Operation
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the Sunroof Maintenance
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is the glass panel.
open.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while
the outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
to the battery and powered at all times.
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door NOTE:
will cancel this feature.
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
discharge.
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• To ensure proper operation a MOPAR® knob and
element must be used.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Ignition OFF Operation
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power • Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
need to be replaced.
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered. • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
3
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Im- In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
proper use of the power outlet can cause damage not outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area
on the center stack of the instrument panel.
Front Center Console Outlet
Front Power Outlet
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
If your vehicle is equipped with a rear full center console,
there is also a power outlet located in the lower storage
area of the rear full center console.
3
Rear Cargo Power Outlet
NOTE: The rear cargo power outlet can be changed to
“battery” powered all the time by switching the power
Rear Full Center Console Outlet
outlet right rear quarter panel fuse in the fuse panel from
The rear cargo power outlet is located in the right rear fuse location F90 to F91.
cargo area.
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Cargo Power Outlet Fuse
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter
Panel
3 — F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
(Continued)
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to
3
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Play- The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
station3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
most power tools.
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overloading
the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices
prior to using the inverter.
WARNING!
Power Inverter
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
CUPHOLDERS
Rear Cupholders
Front Seat Cupholders
Rear Center Arm Rest Cupholders — If Equipped
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers
located in the fold-down center armrest.
located in the center console.
Front Cupholder Location
Rear Center Arm Rest Cupholders
3
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Full Console Cupholders — If Equipped
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers
located in the front of the rear full console.
Control. Refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Light Ring In Rear Full Console Cupholders
Rear Full Console Cupholders
The rear full console cupholders are equipped with a
light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear
passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
Rear Mini Console Cupholders — If Equipped
STORAGE
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers Glove Compartment
located in the front of the rear mini console.
The glove compartment is located on the right side of the
instrument panel.
Rear Mini Console Cupholders
Glove Compartment
3
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To open the glove compartment, pull outward on the Front Center Console
latch and lower the glove box door.
The front center console contains both an upper and a
lower storage area.
Door Storage
Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on
the small latch located on the lid.
access.
Door Panel Storage
Storage Compartment Latches
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on
the small latch located on the front of the lid.
lower storage compartment.
Rear Full Center Console — If Equipped
The rear full center console contains both an upper and a
lower storage area.
3
Upper Storage Compartment
Storage Compartment
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the The upper storage compartment may also be lifted forlower storage compartment.
ward. Push in the release button located on the back of
the lid.
NOTE: Lower storage compartment light is always on
with ignition in the ON/RUN position.
CAUTION!
Remove any items stored in the console cupholders
or devices with cords routing through upper storage
area. Damage may occur to upper console lid and
device cables when upper storage compartment is
lifted forward.
Lower Storage Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
3
Storage Compartment Rear Push Button
When lifted forward there is access to the lower storage
compartment.
Lower Storage Compartment
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: When the lower storage compartment is accessed it Open storage areas, or cubby bins with removable liners,
allows the armrest to flip forward for “fold flat mode”. Fold are located rearward of the cupholders and in the lower
flat mode allows the console armrest to be lowered below front of the console.
fold flat seat plane and protect the armrest vinyl from
damage when using the vehicle to haul cargo.
Console Cubby Bins
Rear Mini Center Console — If Equipped
Fold Flat Mode
An open storage area, or cubby bin with removable liner,
is located in the front of the console.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries
that recharge when snapped back into place.
Push in on the flashlight to release it.
3
Console Cubby Bin
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rechargeable Flashlight
The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the left side of
the cargo area. The flashlight snaps out of the bezel when
needed. The flashlight features two bright LED light
Push And Release
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To operate the flashlight, push the switch once for high, Additional storage can be found in the load floor. To
access the lower storage, lift the handle and raise the
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
storage lid.
Three-Push Switch
Cargo Storage
There is a removable storage bin located on the left side
of the rear cargo area.
Load Floor Handle
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it over the
cargo area.
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
the pillar trim cover.
The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor,
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is
moving.
place.
3
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
Tie-Down Hooks
WARNING!
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
(Continued)
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident,
a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to
come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
WARNING! (Continued)
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
accident.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column.
The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch,
located at the middle of the lever.
3
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
release of the switch, the wipers will resume the continuous rear wiper operation. When this rotary control is in
the OFF position, rotating it downward will activate the
rear washer pump which will continue to operate as long
as the switch is held. Once the switch is released it will
return to the OFF position and the wipers will cycle
several times before returning to the parked position.
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the switch
is released the pump will resume normal operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to position.
the first detent for intermittent operation and to
Rear Window Defroster
the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
Rotating the center portion upward once more
will activate the washer pump which will continue to operate as long as the switch is held. Upon
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control panel. Push this button to turn
on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, push the button a second time.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight
on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must
not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly
distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed
within the roof rack side rails. Crossbars should always
be used whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check
the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains
securely attached.
3
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Deploying the Crossbars
Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends of the crossbar.
1 — Side Rail
2 — Crossbar
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
Thumb Screw
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
NOTE: The thumb screws cannot be fully removed.
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
Remove the crossbar from the stowed position by sliding
the crossbar towards the center of the roof. Repeat with
crossbar on the opposite side.
CAUTION!
Be careful when handling the crossbars to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
Starting with one crossbar, bend down the pivot supports
at each end.
Removing Crossbars
Bending Pivot
3
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Position the crossbars across the roof making sure the Slide the cross bar into to the deploy position by moving
letters on the crossbars align with the matching letters on it towards the matching letter in the side rail. Be sure the
the side rail.
crossbar is fully deployed with the crossbar pushed as far
into the slot as possible. Once the crossbar is in place,
tighten both thumb screws completely.
Positioning Crossbars
Installing Crossbars
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
Deploy and tighten the second crossbar to complete the Stowing The Crossbars
deployment of the crossbars.
Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends. Slide the crossbar away from the
matching letter to remove it from the deployed position.
Repeat with the other crossbar.
CAUTION!
Be careful when handling the crossbars to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
Deployed Crossbars
3
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Starting with the one crossbar, bend up the pivot sup- Then, position the crossbar along the correct side rail.
ports at each end.
Make sure the letters on the crossbar align with the
matching letters on the side rail.
Crossbar Pivot
Stowing Crossbars
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
Slide the crossbar outward, away from the center of the Once the driver’s side crossbar is in place, tighten the
roof. The crossbar will nest fully within the side rail.
thumb screws completely.
3
Crossbar To Side Rail
Tightening Crossbar
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Repeat the procedure to stow the second crossbar on the • If any metallic object is placed over the satellite radio
opposite side.
antenna (if equipped), you may experience interruption of satellite radio reception.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
Stowed Crossbars
NOTE:
• To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the
side rails when they are not in use.
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars deployed. The load should be secured
and placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
the roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the
roof, place a blanket or other protective layer
between the load and the roof surface.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Load should always be secured to cross bars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supplementary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the
straps and thumb wheels frequently to be sure that
the load remains securely attached.
• Long loads that extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .288
▫ DID Green Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
▫ DID Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .290
▫ Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items . . . . . . . .314
䡵 DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) . . . . .299 䡵 Uconnect® SETTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
▫ DID Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
▫ Engine Oil Life Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
▫ DID Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
5.0 Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
▫ DID White Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
▫ DID Amber Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
▫ DID Red Telltales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
8.4 Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
4
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .352
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . .353
▫ Connecting The iPod® Or External USB
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
▫ Using This Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
▫ Second Row USB Charging Port . . . . . . . . . . .354
䡵 Uconnect® REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE)
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
▫ Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
▫ Dual Video Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
▫ Blu-ray™ Disc Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
▫ Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
▫ Play A DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc Using The
Touchscreen Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
▫ Important Notes For Dual Video Screen
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
▫ Blu-ray™ Disc Player Remote Control — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
▫ Replacing The Remote Control Batteries. . . . . .367
▫ Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
▫ Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
▫ Replacing The Headphone Batteries. . . . . . . . .369
▫ Unwired® Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
䡵 CD/DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc MAINTENANCE . . . .378
▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .379
▫ Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . . .379
▫ Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
▫ General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
▫ Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
▫ Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .389
▫ Uconnect® Access (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . .408
▫ Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . .391
▫ Register (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
▫ Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
䡵 Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS . .398
▫ Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
▫ Introducing Uconnect® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
▫ Yelp® (8.4A/8.4AN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link™ (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . .413
▫ Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
4
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Radio
— Glove Compartment
— Climate Controls
6 — Lower Switch Bank
7 — Hazard Switch
8 — Ignition Start/Stop Button
9 — Dimmer Switch
10 — Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to the
ON/RUN position, this light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb
check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will
sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver
or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat
Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
3. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
4. High Beam Indicator
Indicates that headlights are on high beam.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
5. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
8. Speedometer
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog Indicates vehicle speed.
lights are on.
9. Selectable DID Information
6. Selectable DID Information
This area of the cluster will display selectable informaThis area of the cluster will display selectable informa- tion such as compass, outside temperature, etc. For
tion such as compass, outside temperature, etc. For further information, refer to “Driver Information Display
further information, refer to “Driver Information Display (DID) — If Equipped” of your Owner’s Manual for more
(DID) — If Equipped” of your Owner’s Manual for more information.
information.
10. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
7. Turn Signal Indicator
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that
The arrows will flash with the exterior turn
signals when the turn signal lever is operated.
monitors engine and automatic transmission conA tone will chime, and an DID message will trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
appear if either turn signal is left on for more the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
than 1 mile (1.6 km).
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
for a defective outside light bulb.
4
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Certain conditions, poor fuel quality, may illuminate the
light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if
the light stays on through several of your typical driving
cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally
and will not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
11. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
(Continued)
12. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a
problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
4
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake,
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied, or a brake fault is
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necesdetected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
sary.
inspected by an authorized dealer.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
tion.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
13. Fuel Gauge/Fuel Door Reminder
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumiwhere the fuel door is located. The pointer shows the nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
the ON/RUN position.
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
14. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
should be checked monthly when cold and Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the low tire pressure telltale.
4
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
15. Driver Information Display (DID)/Odometer Dis- When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
play
shows the Driver Information Display (DID) messages.
Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” of your
The odometer display shows the total distance the veOwner’s Manual for more information.
hicle has been driven.
16. Selectable DID Menu
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the This area of the cluster will display the DID selectable
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your menu. For further information, refer to “Driver Informaodometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair tion Display (DID)” section of your Owner’s Manual for
technician should leave the odometer reading the same more information.
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
17. Air Bag Warning Light
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant
must be reset at zero.
4
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your 20. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Vehicle” of your Owner’s Manual for further Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
information.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
18. Vehicle Security Light
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
This light will flash rapidly for approximately
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is
engine
running.
If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Inarming. The light will flash at a slower speed
dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
continuously after the alarm is set. The security
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
light will also come on for about three seconds when the
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
ignition is first turned on.
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
19. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
Light — If Equipped
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con- problem diagnosed and corrected.
trol (ESC) is off.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
NOTE:
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC The Driver Information Display (DID) features a driverActivation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on interactive display that is located in the instrument
momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned cluster.
to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the
ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
21. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
4
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The DID Menu items consists of the following:
• Speedometer
• MPH or KM/H
• Vehicle Info
• Driver Assist
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
• Audio
• Stored Messages
• Screen Setup
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
DID Steering Wheel Buttons
• UP Arrow Button
Push and release the UP button to scroll upward through the main menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
• DOWN Arrow Button
and hold the OK arrow button for two seconds to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
Push and release the DOWN button to scroll
DID Displays
downward through the main menu.
• RIGHT Arrow Button
The DID displays are located in the center portion of the
cluster and consist of multiple sections:
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to 1. Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will
illuminate in grey under normal conditions, yellow for
access the information screens or submenu
non critical warnings, red for critical warnings, and
screens of a main menu item.
white for on demand information.
• LEFT Arrow Button
2. Audio Information and Sub-menu Information —
Push the LEFT arrow button to return to the
Whenever there are submenus available, the position
main menu from an info screen or submenu
within the submenus is shown here.
item.
3. Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
• OK Button
4. Telltales/Indicators
Push the OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. Push 5. Gear Selector Status (PRNDL)
4
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. Selectable Information (Compass, Temp, Range to condition that activated it remains active) and can be
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average Fuel Economy, Current reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item. Examples of this message type are “Right Front Turn Signal
Fuel Economy)
Lamp Out” and “Low Tire Pressure.”
7. Air Suspension Status — If Equipped
• Unstored Messages
8. 4WD Status — Status
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
9. Selectable Gauge 1
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
The main display area will normally display the main of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle).
menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warning or information messages. These pop up messages fall These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
into several categories:
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
• Five Second Stored Messages
“Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and “Press Brake
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of Pedal and Push Button to Start.”
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
• Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. An
example of this message type is “Automatic High Beams
On.”
Engine Oil Life Reset
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
OK button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure.
Oil Change Reset Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
will display in the DID for five seconds after a single
within 10 seconds.
chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system 3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the
is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
driving style.
Oil Change Required
4
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you • Service Electronic Throttle Control
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
• Service Power Steering
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
• Cruise Off
DID Messages
• Cruise Ready
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• ACC Override
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to
• Service Air Bag System
XX”
• Traction Control Off
• Service Tire Pressure System
• Washer Fluid Low
• Speed Warning Set
• Oil Pressure Low
• Speed Warning Exceeded
• Oil Change Due
• Parking Brake Engaged
• Fuel Low
• Brake Fluid Low
• Service Antilock Brake System
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
• Service Electronic Braking System
• Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
• Engine Temperature Hot
• Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
• Battery Voltage Low
• Remote Start Aborted Door Open
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
• Lights On
• Remote Start Aborted Tailgate Open
• Right Turn Signal Light Out
• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
• Left Turn Signal Light Out
• Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset
• IGN OR ACC
• Service Airbag System
• Vehicle Not In Park
• Service Airbag Warning Light
• IGN OR ACC KEYLESS GO
• Door Open
• Key in Ignition Lights On
• Doors Open
• Remote Start Active Key to Run
• Liftgate Open
• Remote Start Active Push Start Button
• Gear Not Available
4
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Shift Not Allowed
• Transmission Too Cold Idle With Engine On
• Vehicle Speed To High To Shift
• Washer Fluid Low
• Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse
• Autostick Unavailable Service Required
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
• Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req.
DID White Telltales
• Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake
• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift To Park Wait to Cool
This area will show reconfigurable white caution telltales. These telltales include:
• Transmission Cool Ready to Drive
• Cruise Ready
• Service Transmission
• Service Shifter
• Engage Park Brake To Prevent Rolling
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the
Adaptive Cruise Control system is ready to be
activated.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUThis area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell- TRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light
turns off.
tales. These telltales include:
• Service Forward Collision Warming — If Equipped
• Low Fuel Telltale
DID Amber Telltales
This light warns the driver of a potential collision with the vehicle in front and prompts the
driver to take action in order to avoid the
collision. For further information, refer to
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
This telltale will turn on to indicate the wind- The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
shield washer fluid is low.
• Service Adaptive Cruise Control — If Equipped
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
(11.0 L), this light will turn on and remain on until
fuel is added.
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
operating and needs service. For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
This telltale indicates that the transmission
(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of
fluid temperature is running hot. This may
Your
Vehicle.”
occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing.
If this telltale turns on, safely pull over and
• Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale
4
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
DID Red Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
telltales include:
• Door Ajar
• Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as
possible.
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
• Charging System Light
more doors may be ajar.
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes on while
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut the charging system light remains on, it means that the
off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
when this light turns on.
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authoDo not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. rized dealer.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine. If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
• Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
light will come on when the ignition is first
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate, and a single
chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further
overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H,
a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed
to cool.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
vehicle has completely stopped and the gear selector is stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authoservice. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
required. You may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may
require towing.
4
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Electric Power Steering Malfunction – If Equipped
DID Selectable Menu Items
This telltale is on when the Electric Power Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until
the desired Selectable Menu icon/title is highlighted in
Steering is not operating and needs service.
the DID.
• Liftgate Ajar
Speedometer
This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Speedometer menu is displayed in the DID. Push and
may be ajar.
release the OK button to toggle units (km/h or mph) of
digital speedometer.
DID Green Telltales
MPH To km/h
• Electronic Speed Control SET
This telltale will illuminate green when the electronic speed control is SET. For further information, refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button
until the MPH to km/h ICON is highlighted in
the DID. Push and release the OK button to
change the display between MPH or km/h.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
• If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To
XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire
pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
pressure value of the low tire are displayed in a
button until the Vehicle Info icon/title is highdifferent color than the other tire pressure value.
lighted in the DID. Push and release the
RIGHT arrow button and Coolant Temp will • If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service
be displayed. Push the LEFT or RIGHT arrow button to
Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
scroll through the information submenus and push the
OK button to select or reset the following resettable Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset.
submenus:
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
Tire Pressure Monitor System
under “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Push and release the LEFT or RIGHT arrow button until
Transmission Temperature
“Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the DID.
• If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is • Displays the actual transmission temperature.
Vehicle Info
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of Oil Temperature
the ICON.
• Displays the actual oil temperature.
4
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Pressure
Fuel Economy
• Displays the actual oil pressure.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Fuel Economy Menu icon/title
is highlighted. Push and hold the OK button to
reset feature.
Oil Life
Battery Voltage
Driver Assist — If Equipped
• Range
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow • Current MPG or L/100 km
button until the Driver Assist display icon/title
• Average MPG or L/100 km
is highlighted in the DID. For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Trip
— If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle.”
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Trip icon/title is highlighted in
the DID, then toggle left or right to select Trip
A or Trip B.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
The Trip A and Trip B information will display the Stored Messages
following:
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Messages Menu icon/title is highlighted in
• Distance mi
the DID. This feature shows the number of
• Average Fuel Economy
stored warning messages. Pushing the RIGHT
arrow button will allow you to see what the
• Elapsed Time
stored messages are.
Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
Screen Setup
Audio
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Audio Menu icon/title is highlighted in the DID.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Screen Setup Menu icon/title
is highlighted in the DID. Push and release the
OK button to enter the submenus and follow
the prompts on the screen as needed. The Screen Setup
feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location
that information is displayed.
4
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
• Trip A
Current Gear
• Trip B
• On
Upper Right
• Off
• None
Upper Left
• Compass (default setting)
• None
• Outside Temp
• Compass
• Time
• Outside Temp (default setting)
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Time
• Fuel Economy Average
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Fuel Economy Current
• Fuel Economy Average
• Trip A
• Fuel Economy Current
• Trip B
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
Restore To Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default
Settings)
• Cancel
• Okay
Uconnect® SETTINGS
The Uconnect® system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel that allow you to
access and change the customer programmable features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
4
Uconnect® 5.0 Buttons On Touchscreen And Buttons On
Faceplate
1 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Faceplate
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect®
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through
menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the
center of the control knob one or more times to select or
change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect® system may also have Screen Off and
Back buttons located below the Uconnect® system.
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Buttons On Faceplate And
Buttons On Touchscreen
1 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Faceplate
Push the Screen Off button to turn off the Uconnect®
touchscreen. Push the Screen Off button a second time to
turn the touchscreen on.
Push the Back button to exit out of a Menu or certain
option on the Uconnect® system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect® display.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
5.0 Personal Settings
When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting and make
your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press
the Back Arrow/Done button on the touchscreen or the
Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous
menu or press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close
out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down
Arrow buttons on the right side of the screen will allow
you to toggle up or down through the available settings.
Push the MORE button on the faceplate to display the
menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect® system
allows you to access programmable features that may be
equipped such as Display, Voice, Clock & Date, Safety &
Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort, NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition
Engine Off Options, Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/ in the “Run” position.
Bluetooth®, Sirius Setup, Restore Settings, Clear Personal
Data, and System Information.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+”
and “–” buttons on the touchscreen. Then press the arrow
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
back button on the touchscreen.
the following settings will be available.
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
• Display Mode
Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and
When in this display you may select the “Auto” or the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
“Manual” display settings. To change Mode status, press ⬙parade⬙ positions.
and release the “Auto” or “Manual” button on the
touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the • Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
touchscreen.
When in this display, you may select the overall screen
NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display brightness with the headlights off. Adjust the brightness
Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen
the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+”
and “–” buttons on the touchscreen. Then press the arrow
even though the headlights are on.
back button on the touchscreen.
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
Display
When in this display, you may select the overall screen
brightness with the headlights on. Adjust the brightness
with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
⬙parade⬙ positions.
• Set Language
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
languages (English/Français/Español) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set Language”
button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
• Units
“Metric” to make your selection. Press the back arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a button on the touchscreen is
pressed. Press the “Touchscreen Beep” button on the
touchscreen then select from “on” or “off.” Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may select to have the DID,
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed When in this display, you may change the Voice Rebetween US and Metric units of measure. Press “US” or sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, press the “Voice Response Length” button on the
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
touchscreen and select from “Brief” or “Detailed.” Press arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the select “AM” or “PM.” Press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
previous menu.
• Show Command List
• Set Date
When in this display, you may change the Show Command List settings. To change the Show Command List
settings, press the “Show Command List” button on the
touchscreen and select from “Always,” “With Help” or
“Never.” Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
When in this display, you may set the date manually.
Press the “Set Date” button then press the corresponding
arrows above and below the current date to adjust. Press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
Clock & Date
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touch- touchscreen the following settings will be available:
screen the following settings will be available:
• ParkSense®
• Set Time
The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the
When in this display, you may set the time and format vehicle when the transmission shift lever/gear selector is
manually. Press the “Set Time” button then choose from in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18
a “12 hour” or “24 hour format.” Press the corresponding km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be
enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To
change the ParkSense® status, press and release the
“Sound Only” or “Sounds and Display” button. Then
press the back arrow button on the touchscreen. Refer to
“ParkSense®” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for system function and operating information.
• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse
When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview
mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
RUN position and the transmission shift lever/gear
selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will
move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. To make your selection,
press the “Tilt Mirrors In Reverse” button on the touchscreen and make your selection. Press the back arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
• ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera
display whenever the shift lever/gear selector is put into
REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio
touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check
entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After
five seconds, this note will disappear. To make your
selection, press the “ParkView® Backup Camera Active
Guidelines” button on the touchscreen and make your
selection. Press arrow button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu.
• ParkView® Backup Camera Delay
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
4
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK
or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. To set the
ParkView® Backup Camera Delay push the MORE button on the faceplate, the “settings” button on the touchscreen, then the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on
the touchscreen. Press the “Parkview Backup camera
Delay” button on the touchscreen to turn the ParkView®
Delay ON or OFF.
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press the
“Rain Sensing” button on the touchscreen and make your
selection. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
and operating information. To make your selection, press
the “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen and
make your selection. Press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Headlights Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay
setting, press the “Headlight Off Delay” button on the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90 your selection, press the “Lights w/Wipers” button on
seconds. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen the touchscreen and make your selection. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
to return to the previous menu.
menu.
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
• Auto High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) will activate/deactivate automatically under certain contransmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status, ditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
press the “Illuminated Approach” button and choose Beams” button on the touchscreen and make your seleceither 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90 seconds. Press the back tion. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous return to the previous menu. Refer to “Automatic High
Beam Headlamp Control — If Equipped” in “Undermenu.
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further infor• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
mation.
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
4
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touch- • Auto Door Locks
screen and make your selection. Press the back arrow
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock autobutton on the touchscreen to return to the previous
matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
menu.
(24 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto Door
• Flash Lights w/Lock
Locks” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
or “Off.” Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
to return to the previous menu.
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the Passive Entry • Auto Unlock On Exit
Feature. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
w/Lock” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
or “Off.” Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
to return to the previous menu.
opened. To make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock
On Exit” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
Doors & Locks
or “Off.” Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchto return to the previous menu.
screen the following settings will be available.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
• Flash Lights w/Lock
• Horn w/Remote Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the Passive Entry
Feature. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights
w/Lock” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
or “Off.” Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the “Horn w/Remote Start” button on the touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off.” Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
• Horn w/Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the Key Fob Lock button is pressed. To make your
selection, press the “Sound Horn With Lock” button on
the touchscreen and select from “Off,” ”1st Press,” or
“2nd Press.” Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• Remote Door Unlock
When “Remote Door Unlock” is selected, you may
choose from “Driver” or “All.” Select “All” to have all
doors unlock with the first push of the Key Fob. Select
“Driver” to have the only the driver door open with the
first push of the key fob.
4
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Passive Entry — If Equipped. If “All” is selected,
all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry door
handle is grasped. If “Driver” is selected, only the
driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is
grasped.
vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Memory
Linked to Fob” button on the touchscreen and select from
“On” or “Off.” Press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location if “Memory Linked to Fob” is set to (ON) when
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is used to
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for furEntry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
ther information.
your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the
touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off. Press the back • Power Lift Gate Alert — If Equipped
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
This feature plays an alert when the power lift gate is
menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To
raising or lowering. To make your selection, press the
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa“Power Lift Gate Alert” button on the touchscreen and
tion.
select from “On” or “Off.” Press the back arrow button on
• Memory Linked to Fob — If Equipped
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• Passive Entry
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start” After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
button on the touchscreen the following settings will be touchscreen the following settings will be available.
available:
• Easy Exit Seats — If Equipped
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
When this feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit Seats”
heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when button on the touchscreen and make your selection. Press
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When tempera- the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
tures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will previous menu.
turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto Heated
• Headlight Off Delay
Seats” button on the touchscreen, then select either “Off,”
“Remote Start” or “All Starts.” Press the back arrow When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. Press the “Headlight Off Delay”
menu.
button on the touchscreen and choose from “0,” “30,”
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“60,” or “90” seconds to select your desired time interval. Compass Settings — If Equipped
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the
to the previous menu.
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Engine Off Power Delay
• Variance
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. Press the “Engine Off Power Delay” button on the touchscreen and
choose from “0 sec,” “45 sec,” “5 min” or “10 min” to
select your desired time interval. Then press the arrow
back button on the touchscreen.
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the
instrument panel, such as Mobile Phones, Laptops and
Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is
located, and it can cause interference with the compass
sensor, and it may give false readings.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
by pressing the “ON” button on the touchscreen and
completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects). The compass will
now function normally.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Equalizer
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–”
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
Compass Variance Map
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
• Perform Compass Calibration
touchscreen. Press the back arrow/Done button on the
Press the “Calibration” button on the touchscreen to touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
change this setting. This compass is self-calibrating,
which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass. • Balance/Fade
When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
until it is calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or use the
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
arrows to adjust, tap the “C” icon to readjust to the center. • AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
return to the previous menu.
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
To make your selection, press the “AUX Volume Offset”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.” Press the
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the touch- the previous menu.
screen and select from “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” buttons on • Loudness — If Equipped
the touchscreen. Press the back arrow/Done button on
This feature improves sound quality at lower volumes.
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
To make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.” Press the back
arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
previous menu.
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.” Press the
back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to
the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip
followed by pressing the back arrow button on the
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
touchscreen.
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Subscription Information
• Paired Devices
Phone/Bluetooth®
This feature shows which phones are paired to the New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch- Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
screen, the following settings will be available:
to access the Subscription Information screen.
• Channel Skip
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to the screen or visit the provider online.
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
and is available for U.S. residents only.
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Restore Settings
• Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To remove
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”
• Restore Settings
button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display, you want to clear all personal data?” select “Yes” to Clear,
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings. or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data has been cleared, a pop
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the up appears stating ⬙Personal data cleared”. Press the back
Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?” menu.
select “Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the
settings are restored, a pop up appears stating ⬙settings System Information
reset to default.⬙ Press the back arrow button on the After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen to exit.
touchscreen the following information will be available:
Clear Personal Data
• System Information
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button When System Information is selected, a System Informaon the touchscreen the following settings will be avail- tion screen will appear displaying the system software
able:
version.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
Once the setting is complete, press the Back Arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu
or press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of
Press the “Apps” or the “Controls” button on the touchscreen, then press the “Settings” button on the touch- the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
button on the right side of the screen will allow you to
screen to display the menu setting screen. In this mode
toggle up or down through the list of available settings.
the Uconnect® system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display, Display
Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
& Locks, Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off Options, Audio,
the following settings will be available.
Phone/Bluetooth®, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings,
• Display Mode
Clear Personal Data, and System Information.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
8.4 Personal Settings
NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
To adjust the setting of a programmable feature, press the
desired setting option. Once in the desired setting option,
press and release the preferred setting until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
been selected.
When in this display you may select one of the auto
display settings. To change Mode status, select from
“Day,” “Night” or “Auto” until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen.
4
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display • Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and
even though the headlights are on.
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and touchscreen.
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the
touchscreen.
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
⬙parade⬙ positions.
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with • Set Theme
Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and
This feature will allow you to choose a background
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
theme for the display screen. The theme will change the
⬙parade⬙ positions.
background color, highlight color, and button color of the
display screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
• Set Language
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
languages (English / Français / Español) for all display
nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set Language”
button on the touchscreen, then select the desired language button on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when button on the touchscreen is pressed.
Press the “Touchscreen Beep” button on the touchscreen
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
• Units
When in this display, you may select to have the DID,
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed
between US and Metric units of measure. Press “US” or
“Metric” until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
• Controls Screen Time-Out
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
ability for the controls screen to time out. Press the
“Controls Screen Time-Out” button on the touchscreen
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
4
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn Displayed In Cluster — If
Equipped
Length, press the “Brief” or “Detailed” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
When this feature is selected, To make your selection,
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
press the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn Displayed In Clusprevious menu.
ter” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been • Show Command List
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen When in this display, you may choose to Always, With
to return to the previous menu.
Help, or Never display the Teleprompter with possible
options while in a voice session. To change the Show
Command List settings, press the “Always,” “With
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the
Help,” or “Never” button on the touchscreen until a
following settings will be available:
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
• Voice Response Length
setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re- the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Voice
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
Clock
• Set Time Minutes
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The
following settings will be available:
“Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
• Sync Time With GPS
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or
This feature will allow the radio to sync time with a GPS down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
signal. To change the Sync Time setting, press the “Sync return to the previous menu.
time with GPS” button on the touchscreen until a checkmark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has • Time Format
been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touch- This feature will allow you to select the time format
screen to return to the previous menu.
display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
• Set Time Hours
“12hrs” or “24hrs” setting, showing that setting has been
This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be to return to the previous menu.
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or • Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the
return to the previous menu.
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
4
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Status setting press the “Show Time in Status Bar” button
on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you
are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change
the FCW status, press and release the “Near” or “Far”
button. Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button
Vehicle”.
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Active Braking —
able:
If Equipped
• Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
Safety & Driving Assistance
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an
audible and/or visual warning to potential forward
collisions. The feature can be can be set to Far, or set to
Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This
means the system will warn you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther
away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change
the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The
ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make
your selection, press the “Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) with Mitigation - Active Braking” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
indicating that the setting had been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu. For further information, refer to “Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
• ParkSense®
The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the
vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE
and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It
will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate
the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled
with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the
ParkSense® status, press and release the “Sound” or
“Sound and Display” button. Then press the back arrow
button on the touchscreen. Refer to “ParkSense®” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and operating information.
• Front ParkSense® Chime Volume
The Front ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be
selected from the Driver Information Display (DID) or
Uconnect® System — if equipped. The chime volume
settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory
default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make your selection, press the “ParkSense® Front Chime Volume” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its last
known configuration state through ignition cycles.
• Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume
The Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be
selected from the DID or Uconnect® System — if
equipped. The chime volume settings include LOW,
MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting
is MEDIUM. To make your selection, press the
4
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“ParkSense® Rear Chime Volume” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu. ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
• Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
When this feature is selected, the exterior side view
mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, press the “Tilt Side
Mirrors In Reverse” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• Blind Spot Alert
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected,
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and
will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors.
When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind
Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the
exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn
signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot
Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the
Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Off,” “Lights” or
“Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen. Then press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
• ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera
display whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE.
The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen
display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. To change the mode status,
press the “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
• ParkView® Backup Camera Delay
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
“PARK” or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
To set the ParkView® Backup Camera Delay press the
“Controls” button on the touchscreen, the “settings”
button on the touchscreen, then the “Safety & Driving
Assistance” button on the touchscreen. Press the
4
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“Parkview Backup camera Delay” button on the touch- setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on
screen to turn the ParkView® Delay ON or OFF.
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
Lights
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press the
“Rain Sensing” button on the touchscreen, until a checkmark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
had been selected. Press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows adjustment of the
amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine
is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay setting,
press the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to select
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
your desired time interval, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec,
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) 60 sec or 90 seconds. Press the back arrow button on the
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function back button on the faceplate.
and operating information. To make your selection, press • Headlight Illumination On Approach
the “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
press the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to select
your desired time interval. Press the back arrow button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or
push the back button on the faceplate.
• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
Beams” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu, or push the back button
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
on the faceplate. Refer to “Automatic High Beam Headin the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on aplamp Control — If Equipped” in “Understanding The
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make • Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
your selection, press the Headlights With Wipers button
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
whenever the vehicle is set in motion. To make your
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
selection, press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
4
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the • Auto Door Locks
previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto• Flash Lights With Lock
matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto Door
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
Locks” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
to return to the previous menu, or push the back button
selected. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights
on the faceplate.
with Lock” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been • Auto Unlock On Exit
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
to return to the previous menu, or push the back button
the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or
on the faceplate.
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
Doors & Locks
make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock on Exit”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchnext to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
screen the following settings will be available.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
to the previous menu, or push the back button on the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
faceplate.
previous menu.
• Flash Lights With Lock
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with press the “Sound Horn with Remote Start” button on the
or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting,
make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock” showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
next to setting, indicating that the setting has been menu.
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen • 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
to return to the previous menu.
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob
• Sound Horn With Lock
Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
the door locks are activated. To make your selection, UNLOCK button. You must press the RKE transmitter
press either the “Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd Press” button UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
4
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate. Refer to
which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know Before
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is proStarting Your Vehicle”.
grammed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the
driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press • Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob — If Equipped
Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, This feature provides automatic recall of all settings
touching the handle more than once will only result in
stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior
the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, mirrors, steering column position and radio station preonce the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/ sets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and
unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the
RKE transmitter).
“Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” button on the
• Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous Auto-On Comfort — If Equipped
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat touchscreen the following settings will be available:
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set • Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat will
automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F
for further information.
(4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the
• Power Lift Gate Chime — If Equipped
driver vented seat will turn on. To make your selection,
This feature plays an alert when the power lift gate is press the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat &
raising or lowering. To make your selection, press the Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start” button on the touch“Power Lift Gate Chime” button on the touchscreen, until screen, then select either “Off,” “Remote Start” or “All
a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that Starts” until a check-mark appears next to setting, showsetting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on ing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow/
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
the back button on the faceplate.
4
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
Engine Off Power Delay status press the press the “+” or
• Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped
“-” button to choose from “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,” “5
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to minutes,” or “10 minutes.” Press the back arrow button
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit • Headlight Off Delay
Seat” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
to return to the previous menu.
Delay status press the “+” or “-” button on the touch• Engine Off Power Delay
screen to select your desired time interval. Press the back
When this feature is selected, the power window arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (if equipped), menu.
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
Engine Off Options
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
directly on the desired setting.
following settings will be available.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
• Balance/Fade
Audio
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows
to adjust, or tap the ‘C’ icon to readjust to the center. Press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen.
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu.
• Equalizer
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble
settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.” Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
4
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
• Paired Phones
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match
button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3.
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu.
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
• Loudness — If Equipped
Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To
make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the
touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
Phone/Bluetooth®
• Paired Audio Sources
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
• Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth®” button on the channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip Restore Settings
followed by pressing the back arrow button on the After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
touchscreen.
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Subscription Information
• Restore Settings
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the
“Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen and pop-up
will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to reset your
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen settings to default?” select “OK” to restore, or “Cancel” to
exit. Once the settings are restored, a pop-up appears
to access the Subscription Information screen.
stating ⬙settings reset to default.⬙
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
4
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Clear Personal Data
System Information
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button After pressing the “System Information” button on the
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail- touchscreen the following information will be available:
able:
• System Information
• Clear Personal Data
When System Information is selected, a System InformaWhen this feature is selected it will remove personal data tion screen will appear displaying the system software
including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To remove version.
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”
button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to For detailed information about your Uconnect® radio,
Clear, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data has been cleared, refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
a pop up appears stating ⬙Personal data cleared.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port, located in the lower section of
the front integrated center stack, in front of the rotary
shifter.
4
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
Connecting The iPod® Or External USB Device
Integrated Center Console USB/AUX SD Card Media
HUB
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod® or external
the vehicles iPod®/USB/MP3 control system (iPod® or
USB device to the vehicles USB/AUX connector port
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
which is located in the center console.
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use.
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely dis- • The audio device can be controlled using the radio
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod® contents.
charged, it may not communicate with the iPod®/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod®/USB/
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
audio device).
Using This Feature
NOTE: For further information, refer to the Uconnect®
By using an iPod® cable, or an external USB device to Supplement Manual.
connect to the USB port:
Second Row USB Charging Port
• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
Second row USB connector ports can be used for chargsystem, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
ing purposes only. Use the connection cable to connect an
etc.) information on the radio display.
iPod® or external USB device to the vehicle’s USB
charging ports which are located either on the rear of the
front center console and/or in the second row center
console.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
4
Front Center Console Rear USB Ports
Second Row Center Console USB Port
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE)
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your Rear Seat Entertainment System is designed to give
your family years of enjoyment. You can play your
favorite CDs, DVDs or Blu-ray™ Discs, listen to audio
over the wireless headphones, or plug and play a variety
of standard video games or audio devices. Please review
this Owner’s Manual to become familiar with its features
and operation.
Getting Started
• Screen(s) located in the rear of front seats: Open the
LCD screen cover by lifting up on cover.
Rear Seat Entertainment System Screen
• Place the ignition in the ON or ACC position.
• Your vehicle may be equipped with a Blu-ray™ Disc
Player. If equipped with a Blu-ray™ Disc Player, the
icon will be present on the Player.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
• Turn on the Rear Seat Entertainment system by push- • With the Dual Video Screen System, Channel 1 (Rear 1)
ing the Power button on the remote control.
on the Remote Control and Headphones refers to
Screen 1 (driver’s side) and Channel 2 (Rear 2) on the
• When the Video Screen(s) are open and a DVD/BluRemote Control and Headphones refers to Screen 2
ray™ Disc is inserted into the Disc player, the screen(s)
(passenger side).
turn(s) ON automatically, the headphone transmitters
turn ON and playback begins.
Rear Seat Entertainment System Channel 1 (Rear 1)
Rear Seat Entertainment System Remote Control
Channel Selector
4
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Dual Video Screen
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Rear Seat Entertainment System.
• The Remote Control
• The Touchscreen Radio (If Equipped)
Blu-ray™ Disc Player
Play A Blu-ray™ Disc
The Blu-ray™ Disc player is located in the center console.
Rear Seat Entertainment System Headphone Channel
Selector
• The system can be controlled by the front seat occupants utilizing either the touchscreen radio, or by the
rear seat occupants using the remote control.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
2. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Rear 1 for driver’s side rear
passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Rear 1.
3. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Rear 2 for passenger side
rear passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Rear 2.
NOTE:
Blu-ray™ Disc Player Location
• To view a Blu-ray disc on the radio press the “Media”
button on the touchscreen, then press the “Disc”
button. Press the “Play” button, then the “full screen”
button.
1. Insert a Blu-ray disc into the VES™ disc player with • Viewing a Blu-ray disc on the radio screen is not
the label facing as indicated on the Blu-ray player. The
available in all states/provinces, and the vehicle must
radio automatically selects the appropriate mode after
be stopped, and the shift lever must be in the PARK
the disc is recognized and displays the menu screen,
position for vehicles with automatic transmission.
the language screen, or starts playing the first track.
4
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Using The Touchscreen Radio
is not highlighted select button to access controls for
Screen 1/Channel 1 source.
2. RSE Power
Press to turn RSE On/Off.
3. RSE Mute
Mute rear headphones for the current ignition cycle.
Pressing mute again will unmute rear headphones.
4. RSE Remote Control Lock Out
Press to enable/disable Remote Control functions.
5. RSE Channel 2 Mode
Rear Media Control Screen
Indicates the current source for Screen 2/Channel 2; This
button will be highlighted when it is the active Screen/
Indicates the current source for Screen 1/Channel 1; This Channel being controlled by the front user. If this button
button will be highlighted when it is the active Screen/ is not highlighted select button to access controls for
Channel being controlled by the front user. If this button Screen 2/Channel 2 source.
1. RSE Channel 1 Mode
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
6. Radio Full Screen Mode
Using The Remote Control
• Select an audio channel (Rear 1 for driver’s side rear
screen and Rear 2 for passenger’s side rear screen),
7. Cabin Audio Mode
then press the source key and using the up and down
Select this button to change the cabin audio to the rear
arrows, highlight disc from the menu and press the OK
entertainment source currently shown on the rear media
button.
control screen.
• Press the popup/menu key to navigate the disc menu
8. RSE Mode
and options.
Select this button to change source for the active (highPlay Video Games
lighted) rear Screen/Channel on the rear media control
Connect the video game console to the Audio/Video
screen.
RCA/HDMI input jacks located on the side of each seat.
• Press the Media button on the touchscreen, then press
the Rear Media button on the touchscreen.
Select this button to change to Full Screen Mode.
• Press the OK button on the touchscreen to begin
playing the Blu-ray™ Disc on the touchscreen radio.
4
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When connecting an external source to the AUX/HDMI
input, ensure to follow the standard color coding for the
audio/video jacks:
1. HDMI Input
2. Right audio in (red)
3. Left audio in (white)
4. Video in (yellow)
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Input Jacks
NOTE: Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation®4 and XBox One will exceed this power limit of the
vehicle’s Power Inverter.
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Jacks (AUX/HDMI Jacks) on Play A DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc Using The
the side of each seat enable the monitor to display video Touchscreen Radio
directly from a video camera, connect video games for
1. Insert the DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc with the label facing as
display on the screen, or play music directly from an MP3
indicated on the DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc player. The
player.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
radio automatically selects the appropriate mode after
the disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or
starts playing the first track.
2. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc on Rear 1 (driver’s
side rear passenger) ensure the Remote Control and
Headphone channel selector switch is on Rear 1.
4
3. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc on Rear 2 (passenger’s side rear passenger) ensure the Remote Control
and Headphone channel selector switch is on Rear 2.
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the SOURCE button on the Remote Control.
Select DISC Mode On The Rear Seat Entertainment
Screen
2. While looking at Rear 1 or 2, highlight DISC by either Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons, then push
1. Press the Media button on the Uconnect® radio touchENTER/OK.
screen.
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Press the Rear Media button to display the Rear Media
Control screen.
Rear Seat Entertainment Source Screen
NOTE: Pressing the screen on the radio while a DVD or
Rear Media Control Screen
Blu-ray™ Disc is playing, brings up the basic remote
3. Press the 1 or 2 buttons on the touchscreen, the select control functions for DVD play such as scene selection,
source button on the touchscreen and then the DISC Play, Pause, FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper
button on the touchscreen in the MEDIA column. To corner will turn OFF the remote control screen functions.
exit press the X at the top right of the screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System
• The Rear Seat Entertainment System is able to transmit
two channels of stereo audio and video simultaneously.
Blu-ray™ Disc Player Remote Control — If
Equipped
• The Blu-ray™ Disc Player can play CDs, DVDs and
Blu-ray™ Discs.
4
• Selecting a video source on Rear 1, the video source
will display on Rear 1 and can be heard on Rear 1.
• Selecting a video source on Rear 2, the video source
will display on Rear 2 and can be heard on Rear 2.
• Audio can be heard through the headphones even
when the screen(s) are closed.
Blu-ray™ Player Remote Control
Controls And Indicators
1. Power — Turns the screen and wireless headphone
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
audio while the screen is closed, push the Power 7. 䉴䉴 — Push and hold to fast forward through the
button to turn the headphone transmitter on.
current audio track or video chapter.
2. Channel Selector Indicators — When a button is 8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) — Begin/resume or pause disc
play.
pushed, the currently affected channel or channel
button is illuminated momentarily.
9. Four Colored Buttons — Push to access Blu-ray™ Disc
features.
3. SOURCE — Push to enter Source Selection screen.
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch — Indicates which 10. POPUP/MENU — Push to bring up repeat and
shuffle options, the Blu-ray™ Disc popup menu, the
channel is being controlled by the remote control.
DVD title menu or to access disc menus.
When the selector switch is in the Rear 1 position, the
remote controls the functionality of headphone Chan11. KEYPAD — Push to navigate chapters or titles.
nel 1 (left screen). When the selector switch is in the
Rear 2 position, the remote controls the functionality 12. ▪ (Stop) — Stops disc play.
of headphone Channel 2 (right screen).
13. 䉳䉳 — Push and hold to fast rewind through the
5. 䉴 — Push to navigate menus.
current audio track or video chapter.
6. SETUP — Push to access the screen settings menu.
14.
— Mutes headphone audio.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
15. BACK — Push to exit out of menus or return to 2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
source selection screen.
16. 䉲 — Push to navigate menus.
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
17. OK — Push to select the highlighted option in a Headphones Operation
menu.
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
18. 䉳 — Push to navigate menus.
19. 䉱 — Push to navigate menus.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on, the channel is not
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
muted and the headphone channel selector switch is on
The remote control requires two AAA batteries for op- the desired channel. If audio is still not heard, check that
fully charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
eration. To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
4
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Controls
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
approximately three minutes after the rear video system
is turned off.
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
Rear Seat Entertainment Headphones
1 — Power Button
2 — Volume Control
3 — Channel Selection Switch
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector
switch is in the same position as the headphone
selector switch.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, push the
BACK button on the remote control.
• When both the headphone and the remote control
channel selector switches are on Channel 1, the Replacing The Headphone Batteries
Remote is controlling Channel 1 and the headphones
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
are tuned to the audio on Channel 1.
operation. To replace the batteries:
• When both the headphone and the remote control
channel selector switches are on Channel 2, the 1. Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover
Remote is controlling Channel 2 and the headphones
downward.
are tuned to the audio on Channel 2.
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
2. Push the SOURCE button on the remote control.
according to the polarity diagram shown.
3. Pushing the SOURCE button will advance to the next
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
mode.
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen, Unwired® Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navi- Warranty
NOTE:
gate to the available modes and push the OK button to Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers
select the new mode.
the initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this
4
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
particular Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wire- FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
less headphone (⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transfer- INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR
able.
NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This warranty lasts
may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
as long as you own the Product.
consequential damages, so the above limitation may not
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal
below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from
use is defective in workmanship or materials.
jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty
does not cover any damage or defect that results from
misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than
by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time
through normal use, are specifically not covered (replacement foam is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED
TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES
OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULTING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE
What Will Unwired® Do? Unwired®, at its option, will
repair or replace any defective Product. Unwired® reserves the right to replace any discontinued Product with
a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE
WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE
PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY
WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
If you have any questions or comments regarding your Display Settings
Unwired® wireless headphones, please phone 1-888-2933332
or
email
customersupport@unwiredtechnology.com.
You may register your Unwired® wireless headphones
online at www.unwiredtechnology.com or by phone at
1-888-293-3332.
4
System Information
Disc Menu
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pushing
the remote control’s POP UP/MENU button displays a
list of all commands which control playback of the disc.
Video Screen Display Settings
When watching a video source (Blu-ray™ Disc or DVD
Video with the disc in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.),
pushing the remote control’s SETUP button activates the
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Display Settings menu. These settings control the appearance of the video on the screen. The factory default
settings are already set for optimum viewing, so there is
no need to change these settings under normal circumstances.
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the
screen closed:
• Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
To change the settings, push the remote control’s naviga- • Close the video screen.
tion buttons (䉱, 䉲) to select an item, then push the • To change the current audio mode, push the remote
remote control’s navigation buttons (䉴, 䉳) to change the
control’s SOURCE button. This will automatically sevalue for the currently selected item. To reset all values
lect the next available audio mode without using the
back to the original settings, select the Default Settings
Mode/Source Select menu.
menu option and push the remote control’s ENTER/OK
• When the screen is reopened, the video screen will
button.
automatically turn back on and show the appropriate
Disc Features control the remote Blu-ray™ Disc player’s
display menu or media.
settings of DVD being watched in the remote player.
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, push
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
the remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If match in order for the disc to play. If the region code for
audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries the DVD disc does not match the region code for the
player, the disc will not play.
are installed in the headphones.
Disc Formats
DVD Audio Support
The Blu-ray™ Disc player is capable of the playing the When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the Blu-ray™ Disc
following types of discs (8 mm or 12 mm diameter):
player, the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by
default (most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title,
• BD: BDMV (Profile 1.1), BDAV (Profile 1.1)
but the Video title is ignored). All multi-channel program
• DVD: DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, AVCREC, AVCHD, material is automatically mixed down to two channels,
DVD-VR
which may result in a lowered apparent volume level. If
you increase the volume level to account for this change
• CD: CD-DA, VCD, CD-TEXT
in level, remember to lower the volume before changing
• DVD/CD: MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX (versions 3 – 6) the disc or to another mode.
profile 3.0
Recorded Discs
DVD Region Codes
The Blu-ray™ Disc player will play CD-R and CD-RW
The Blu-ray™ Disc player and many DVD discs are discs recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a
coded by geographic region. These region codes must CD-ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will
4
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
also play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R or • For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the
DVD-RW disc. DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or reISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format.
corded) are not supported.
Other formats (such as UDF, HFS, or others) are not
supported.
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
be cases where the Blu-ray™ Disc player may not be able • The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99
to play some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a
folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
compatible format and is playable on other players. To
• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play
help avoid playback problems, use the following guidethe Video_TS portion of the disc.
lines when recording discs.
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is
• Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are
playable in the Blu-ray™ Disc player, check with the disc
closed are playable.
recording software publisher for more information about
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CD- burning playable discs.
Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs
each track number is unique.
(CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker.
Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the
disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the
DVD player.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
• Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro,
Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The Blu-ray™
The Blu-ray™ Disc player is capable of playing MP3
player will automatically skip the file and begin play(MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows Media
ing the next available file.
Audio) files from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or
CD-RW).
• If you are creating your own files, the recommended
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps
• The Blu-ray™ Disc player always uses the file extenand the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
sion to determine the audio format, so MP3 files must
between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also
always end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙ or ⬙.MP3⬙ and
supported. For both formats, the recommended
WMA files must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙
sample rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
or ⬙.WMA⬙. To prevent incorrect playback, do not use
these extensions for any other types of files.
• To change the current file, use the remote control’s or
Blu-ray™ Disc player’s 䉱 button to advance to the
• For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such as
next file, or the 䉲 button to return to the start of the
artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
current or previous file.
• Any file that is copy protected (such as those downDisc Errors
loaded from many online music stores) will not play.
The Blu-ray™ player will automatically skip the file If the Blu-ray™ Disc player is unable to read the disc, a
and begin playing the next available file.
⬙Disc Error⬙ message is displayed on the rear screen and
Compressed Audio Files (MP3 and WMA)
4
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio displays. A dirty, damaged, or incompatible disc Product Agreement
format are all potential causes for a ⬙Disc Error⬙ message. This product incorporates copyright protection technolIf a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellecvisible errors that persists for two seconds, the Blu-ray™ tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
Disc player will attempt to continue playing the disc by technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
skipping forward one to three seconds at a time. If the intended for home or other limited viewing uses otherend of the disc is reached, the Blu-ray™ Disc player will wise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
return to the beginning of the disc and attempt to play disassembly is prohibited.
the start of the first track.
Dolby® Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured
The Blu-ray™ Disc player may shut down during extremely hot conditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior temperature is above 120° F (48.9° C). When this
occurs, the player will display ⬙High Temp⬙ and will shut
off the Rear Seat displays until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics
of the Blu-ray™ Disc player.
under license from Dolby Laboratories. ⬙Dolby⬙, ⬙MLP
Lossless⬙, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.
Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All right
reserved.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
access the switches.
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM/
CD/AUX/VES, etc.).
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
4
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The button located in the center of the left-hand control 2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset button.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
CD Player
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
track on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once
or anti-static sprays.
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the 7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating
To keep a CD/DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc in good condition,
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized,
take the following precautions:
or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the before considering disc player service.
surface.
CD/DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc MAINTENANCE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
body.
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is found in radio frequency safety standards and recomnot harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does mendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the community.
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitRADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
ted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However,
the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
USA/CANADA
situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio for authorization before turning on the wireless radio.
is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits.
Regulatory And Safety Information
4
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie • If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de liradio or television reception, which can be determined
cence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouilencouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
lage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout
more of the following measures:
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
receiver.
NOTE:
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
for help.
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the controls on the
instrument panel or through the Uconnect® system display.
4
When the Uconnect® system is in different modes (Radio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
display.
General Overview
Buttons On The Faceplate
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
Uconnect® screen.
Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On The
Faceplate
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons On The Touchscreen
buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect® system screen.
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls —
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Uconnect® 5.0 Automatic Temperature Controls —
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On The
Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to 5. Front Defrost Button
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
will turn off.
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea2. A/C Button
ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
Press and release to change the current setting, the
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
3. Recirculation Button
mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
Press and release to change the current setting, the system will return the previous setting.
indicator illuminates when ON.
6. Rear Defrost Button
4. AUTO Operation Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
Operation” for more information.
4
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
7. Rear Climate Button — If Equipped
Press and release this button to turn on the rear climate
controls. The indicator will illuminate when the rear
climate controls are ON. Performing this function again
will turn OFF the rear climate controls.
8. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate button for
warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press
and slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar
towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for
warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
9. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate button for cooler
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar
towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for
cooler temperature settings.
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or buttons on the touchscreen as
follows:
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
automatically exit Sync.
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
10. SYNC
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the control knob counterclockwise.
Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated
when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize Buttons On The Touchscreen
the passenger temperature setting with the driver tem- Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
perature setting. Changing the passenger temperature and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
11. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
4
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
12. Modes
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
directed
through the defrost and side window demisdemist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
ter
outlets.
as follows:
• Panel Mode
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conAir comes from the outlets in the instrument ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
panel. Each of these outlets can be individu- warmer air from the floor outlets.
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
• Floor Mode
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
amount of air is directed through the defrost
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the
and side window demister outlets.
air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
• Mix Mode
from these outlets.
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This mode works best
in cold or snowy conditions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
touchscreen temperature bar towards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature setPress and release this button to turn the Climate Control
tings.
ON/OFF.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
14. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
Provides the driver with independent temperature con- time.
trol. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler tempera16. Temperature Control (Uconnect® 5.0 Radio Only)
ture settings or on the touchscreen press and slide the
button on the touchscreen temperature bar towards the Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to
blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler tempera- regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
ture settings.
compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red
area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the temNOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
perature bar into the blue area indicates cooler temperaadjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
tures.
time.
Climate Control Functions
15. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
A/C (Air Conditioning)
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button for warmer temperature settings or The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
on the touchscreen, press and slide the button on the to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
13. Climate Control OFF Button
4
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
MAX A/C
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perforNOTE:
mance.
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
prior settings. The button on the touchscreen illuminates
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging
when MAX A/C is ON.
of the windows.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the prior
needed.
settings and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
Recirculation
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
and then turn off.
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate or press the
“AUTO” button on the touchscreen.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temperature buttons on the faceplate or buttons on the touchscreen. Once the desired temperature
is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen
greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed
not necessary to change the temperature. You will
in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation.
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode
the system to function automatically.
is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
4
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
Manual Operation Override
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly
as possible.
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation control.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the Uconnect® customerprogrammable feature. Refer to the “Uconnect® System Settings” in this section of the manual.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
selected in Manual operation.
NOTE: Each of these features operates independently
from each other. If any feature is controlled manually,
temperature control will continue to operate automatically.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear right
side of the 3rd Row seats and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides
heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified
air through the headliner outlets.
4
The rear system temperature control buttons are located
in the Uconnect® system, located on the instrument
panel.
Uconnect® 5.0 Automatic Rear Climate Controls
Touchscreen
1—
2—
3—
4—
ton
Press
Press
Press
Press
Blower Up Button
Mode Button
Temperature Button
Blower Down But-
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Press
Press
Press
Press
Done Button
Rear Lock Button
Rear Auto Button
Rear Off Button
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The
Front ATC Panel
The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of the
rear climate controls from the front ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
• Press ⬙REAR⬙ button to change control to rear control
mode, Rear display will appear. Control functions now
operate rear system.
• To return to Front screen, press ⬙REAR⬙ button again,
or it will revert to the Front screen after six seconds.
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Rear Climate Controls Touchscreen
1 — Press Rear Auto Button
2 — Press Rear Lock Button
3 — Press Front Climate Button
4 — Press Temperature Up
Button
5 — Press Temperature Down
Button
6 — Press
7 — Press
8 — Press
ton
9 — Press
Blower Up Button
Mode Button
Blower Down ButRear Off Button
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
Rear Lock
Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock button on the
Uconnect® touchscreen, illuminates a lock symbol in the
rear display. The rear temperature and air source are
controlled from the front Uconnect® system.
4
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC
control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned
off.
The rear ATC is located in the headliner, near the center
of the vehicle.
Rear ATC Control Features
1 — Blower Speed
2 — Rear Temperature
3 — Rear MODE
4 — Rear Temperature Lock
• Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on the
Uconnect® touchscreen. This turns off the Rear Temperature Lock icon in the rear temperature knob.
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the This allows the second row seat occupants to control the
Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs. volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
• ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob
counterclockwise to AUTO.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC
System will automatically achieve and maintain that
comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Manual Climate Control
system through an intake grille, located in the right
side trim panel behind the third row seats. The
heater outlets are located in the right side trim panel,
just behind the sliding door. Do not block or place
objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater
outlets. The electrical system could overload, causing
damage to the blower motor.
NOTE: It is not necessary to move the temperature. The
system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode and
fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
Rear Temperature Control
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
rotate the temperature control knob counterclockwise for
The rear blower control, located in the rear overhead
cold air, and clockwise for heated air.
console, has an off position and a range of blower speeds.
Rear Blower Control
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
Rear Mode Control
• Auto Mode
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
The rear system automatically maintains the correct Operating Tips
mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat occuNOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
pants.
suggested control settings for various weather condi• Headliner Mode
tions.
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each Summer Operation
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corroto one side will shut off the airflow.
sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
• Bi-Level Mode
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032 and 50% water is recommended.
floor outlets.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
4
396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed.
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
is not recommended because it may cause window
rainy or humid weather.
fogging.
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
Vacation Storage
long periods, as fogging may occur.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air Outside Air Intake
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
of compressor damage when the system is started again. enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
Window Fogging
slush, and snow.
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re- A/C Air Filter
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
The climate control system filters outside air containing
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be totally
filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions.
Winter Operation
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
4
398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect®
Key Features:
Start using Uconnect® Voice Recognition with these • 5” touchscreen
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands
• Three buttons on either side of the display
and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect® 5.0
or 8.4A/8.4AN system.
Uconnect® 5.0
Uconnect® 8.4AN
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
9If you see the
icon on your touchscreen, you have
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
the Uconnect® 8.4AN system. If not, you have a
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
Uconnect® 8.4A system.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after
All you need to control your Uconnect® system with
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing
Command from current category.
instructions.
Get Started
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
4
400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect® system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Uconnect® Voice Command
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text
2 — For all radios: Push To Begin Radio or Media functions. For
8.4A/8.4AN only: Push to begin Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions
3 — Push To End Call
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401
4
Uconnect® 5.0
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN
402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio® stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio® trial
required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, press the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you with
a list of commands.
Uconnect® 5.0 Radio
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403
Media
Uconnect® offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth®
and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and iPod® devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth®
• Change source to iPod®
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Radio
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
4
404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your iPod® or USB device. Your Voice
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
song and genre information is displayed.
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Media
Uconnect® 5.0 Media
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect®. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”
4
. After the beep, say one of
Push the Phone button
the following commandsѧ
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
Uconnect® 5.0 Phone
406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
. After the beep, say: “Reply.”
the Phone button
2. Listen to the Uconnect® prompts. After the beep,
repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the
system prompts.
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Phone
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect® will announce incoming text messages. Push
and say Listen. (Must have comthe Phone button
patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect® system.)
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in Traffic.
See you later.
Start without
No.
I’ll be Late.
me.
Okay.
Where are you? I will be <number> minutes
Are you there
Call me.
late.
yet?
I’ll call you
I need
See you in
later.
directions.
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost.
Thanks.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone® iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only.
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)
4
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures handsfree and keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate
control.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate
408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)
The Uconnect® navigation feature helps you save time
and become more productive when you know exactly
how to get to where you want to go. (Navigation is
optional on the Uconnect® 8.4A system. See your dealer
to activate navigation at any time.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
the beep, say:
. After
• For the 8.4A Uconnect® System, say: “Enter state.”
• For the 8.4AN Uconnect® System, say: “Navigate to
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation
Uconnect® Access (8.4A/8.4AN)
. After An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect® Access services in the next
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect® Access,
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found
on the next page.
Roadside Assistance Call
Wi-Fi Hotspot***
**If vehicle is equipped.
NOTE: Uconnect® Access is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States ***Extra charges apply.
and Alaska. Services can only be used where coverage is Register (8.4A/8.4AN)
available; see coverage map for details.
1. Press the Apps button on the bottom of the 8.4-inch
9-1-1 Call
touchscreen.
Security Alarm Notification
2. If a pop-up message appears, press Register or go to
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn and Lights
Yelp® Search
Voice Texting
the Favorite Apps menu and press Uconnect® Registration.
3. Read through the registration instructions. Enter and
confirm your personal email address. Then press
Send.
4. Check your personal inbox for an email from
Uconnect® Access.
4
410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Click on the link inside the email within 72 hours and
complete the easy online registration process to create
a personal Mopar® Owner Connect account linked to
your vehicle.
Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN)
Securely link your mobile device to your vehicle with the
Uconnect® Access App. Once you have downloaded the
App, you may start your vehicle or lock it from virtually
any distance. (Vehicle must be properly equipped with
factory-installed Remote Start.)
Uconnect® Registration 8.4A/8.4AN
Mobile App
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411
Download the Uconnect® Access App to a compatible 2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the
Apple® or Android® mobile devices. All you need to do
message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect®
is:
to process your message.
1. After registering with Uconnect® Access, log on to 3. The Uconnect® system will repeat your message and
your Mopar® Owner Connect account at
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
moparownerconnect.com.
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect®
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy
2. On the Dashboard page, enter your mobile phone
with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
number to receive a link to download the App on your
mobile device. Or go to iTunes®, or Google Play, and You must be registered with Uconnect® Access and have
a compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your
search for the Uconnect® Access App.
voice to send a personalized text message.
3. To activate the App, enter your Mopar Owner Connect
user name and password and log in. Your vehicle is TIP:
then connected to your mobile device.
• Not compatible with iPhone®.
Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN)
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
1. To send a message, push the Phone button
. After
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
the beep, say the following command: “Send mesilluminated to use the feature.
sage to John Smith.”
4
412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or
Once registered with Uconnect® Access, you can use
Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
your voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you.
Yelp® (8.4A/8.4AN)
1. Press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “All Apps” button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.
4. Once the YELP® home screen appears on the touch, then say: “YELP
screen, push the VR button
search.”
5. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Uconnect® the place or business that you’d like
Uconnect® to find.
Yelp®
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413
SiriusXM Travel Link™ (8.4A/8.4AN)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,
check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?
SiriusXM Travel Link™ is a suite of services that brings a
wealth of information right to your Uconnect® 8.4AN
system. (Not available for 8.4A system.)
4
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
SiriusXM Travel Link™
414 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Additional Information
Uconnect® System Support:
© 2015 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,
Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered
trademarks of Yelp.
• U.S. residents call
DriveUconnect.com
1-877-855-8400
or
visit
• Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca
Mon. – Fri., 7:00 am – 12:00 am, ET
Sat., 8:00 am – 10:00 pm, ET
Sun., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
Uconnect® Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241.
Please have your Uconnect® Security PIN ready when
you call.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .427
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
▫ Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
▫ Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . .428
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
䡵 ALL-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . .437
(Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
▫ Single-Speed Operating Instructions/Precautions
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .425
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .425
▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (ThreePosition Switch) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .437
▫ Shifting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
5
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444 䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
— IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
䡵 OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
▫ When To Use LOW Range — If Equipped . . . .445
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .456
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . .447
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .456
▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .457
▫ Traction Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .458
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .459
▫ 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
▫ 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
▫ Ready Alert Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
▫ Rain Brake Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .470
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .472
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .473
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .478
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .481
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .490
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .491
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .492
▫ Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
▫ Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
5
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Service Tpm System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . .498 䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
▫ 3.6L Engine — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
▫ 5.7L Engine — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .503
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. . . . . . . . .512
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513 䡵 SNOW PLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .532
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
▫ Recreational Towing — Rear-Wheel Drive
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
▫ Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive Models
▫ Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal — If
(Single-Speed Transfer Case) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
▫ Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive Models
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
(Two-Speed Transfer Case) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
5
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift
lever/transmission gear selector.
(Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly place the ignition in the START position
and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter
motor will continue to run, and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running. If the engine fails
to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10
seconds. If this occurs, place the ignition in the LOCK/
OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the Remote
Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Key Fob
is in the passenger compartment.
5
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. Place the shift lever/gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
2.
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK, the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds or three short pushes in a row with the vehicle
speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will
shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in
the ACC position until the shift lever/gear selector is
in PARK and the button is pushed twice to the OFF
position. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK
and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed
once, the DID will display a “Vehicle Not In Park”
message and the engine will remain running. Never
leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could
roll.
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN • Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to place the ignition to the RUN position (DID will
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
display “ON/RUN”).
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
OFF position.
return the ignition to the OFF position (DID will
display “OFF”).
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
NEUTRAL Position)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
an externally powered electric engine block heater (availignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
and START. To change the ignition positions without
starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these If Engine Fails To Start
steps:
• Starting with the ignition in the OFF position.
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC position (DID will display
“ACC”).
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
(Continued)
5
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump-Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it.
3. Push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
WARNING!
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
The engine block heater cord is located:
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
• 3.6L Engine — Coiled and strapped to the engine oil
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
dipstick tube.
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
• 5.7L Engine — Bundled and fastened to the injector
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
harness.
(Continued)
5
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift
the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
shifting out of PARK.
stopped or moving at low speeds.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver
avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK.
The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve the vehicle’s overall fuel economy during normal driving conditions. Each time the vehicle is started ECO mode is
engaged and an amber light in the center stack of the
instrument panel will be illuminated. To disable ECO
This system also locks the transmission in PARK when- mode, press the “ECO” switch in the center stack of the
instrument panel and the amber light will go out indiever the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
cating ECO mode is disabled.
5
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The overall driving performance will be more conservative.
• Some ECO mode functions may be temporarily inhibited based on temperature and other factors.
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
gear selector located on the center console. The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both above the gear
selector and in the Driver Information Display (DID). To
select a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector. You
must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission
Fuel Economy Mode Switch
out of PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or
When the Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode is engaged, the
REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
vehicle control systems will change the following:
speeds (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock Sys• The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift tem” in this section). To shift past multiple gear ranges at
once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear
later.
selector to the appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range
for normal driving.
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a current gear in the instrument cluster. Refer to
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are “AutoStick” in this section for further information.
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual
shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control (shift
paddles mounted on the steering wheel). Pressing the
shift paddles (-/+) while in the DRIVE range will manually select the transmission gear, and will display the
5
Electronic Gear Selector
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precauDO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to NOTE: On vehicles equipped with the electronically
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. shifted transfer case, ensure that the transfer case is in
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
AWD AUTO or LOW RANGE position on the AWD
Control Switch. Ensure that the NEUTRAL position light
PARK (P)
is NOT illuminated.
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
WARNING!
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movevehicle in this range.
ment and possible injury or damage.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the • Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
if it is not in PARK. Make sure the transmission is
brake.
in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
Gear Ranges
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
REVERSE (R)
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
PARK, you must start the engine and also press the REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector stop.
could result.
NEUTRAL (N)
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking
the drivetrain.
brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must
The following indicator should be used to ensure that leave the vehicle.
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
WARNING!
• With brake pedal released, look at the transmission
gear position display and verify that it indicates the
PARK position (P).
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick shift
control (refer to AutoStick in this section for further
information) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid
is warm. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
5
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after enTransmission function is monitored electronically for
gine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may 1. Stop the vehicle.
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission
may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and 3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
turns OFF.
illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will
inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and 4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
indicate what actions may be necessary.
5. Restart the engine.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
following steps:
operation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
Operation
When the transmission is in DRIVE, it will operate
automatically, shifting between the eight available gears.
To engage AutoStick, simply tap one of the steering
wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-). Tapping (-) to enter
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer AutoStick mode will downshift the transmission to the
next lower gear, while using (+) to enter AutoStick mode
service is required.
will retain the current gear. When AutoStick is active, the
AutoStick
current transmission gear is displayed in the instrument
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature cluster.
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver,
unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
can also provide you with more control during passing, result. It will remain in the selected gear until another
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described
below.
trailer towing, and many other situations.
5
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the • Holding the (-) paddle depressed will downshift the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current
display the current gear.
speed.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first • Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
AutoStick is engaged.
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
vehicle is accelerated.
fault or overheat condition is detected.
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.
To disengage AutoStick mode, press and hold the (+)
Tapping (+) at a stop will allow starting in second gear.
shift paddle until ⬙D⬙ is once again indicated in the
Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snowy or
instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of AutoStick
icy conditions.
mode at any time without taking your foot off the
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to accelerator pedal.
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
WARNING! (Continued)
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
Single-Speed Operating Instructions/Precautions
— If Equipped
NOTE: This system is not appropriate for conditions
where LOW range is recommended. Refer to “Off-Road
Driving Tips” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Three-Position Switch) — If Equipped
This is an electronic shift transfer case and it is operated
by the AWD Control Switch, which is located on the
This system contains a single-speed (HI range only) center console.
transfer case, which provides convenient full-time allwheel drive. No driver interaction is required. The Brake
Traction Control (BTC) System, which combines standard
ABS and Traction Control, provides resistance to any
wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque transfer
to wheels with traction.
5
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the AWD AUTO position for normal street and
highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads.
For variable driving conditions, the AWD AUTO mode
can be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but
the vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. All-wheel
drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle
senses a loss of traction.
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
LOW RANGE position can be used to lock the front and
rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished
AWD Control Switch (Three-Position)
This electronically shifted transfer case provides three by rotating the AWD Control Switch to the desired
position. Refer to “Shifting Procedure” for specific shiftmode positions:
ing instructions. The LOW RANGE position is designed
• All-wheel drive automatic range (AWD AUTO)
for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the
LOW RANGE position on dry hard surfaced roads may
• All-wheel drive low range (LOW RANGE)
cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)
components.
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
Transfer Case Position Indicator Messages
If One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met:
The Transfer Case Position Indicator messages (AWD
AUTO and LOW RANGE) are located in the Driver
Information Display (DID) and indicate the current and
desired transfer case selection. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information. When you select a different transfer case position, the position indicator lights
will do the following:
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
If All Shift Conditions Are Met:
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn
the control knob back to the current position, wait five
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift require2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the ments, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for your transfer
transfer case completes the shift.
case, located in this section of the owner’s manual.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the The “SERV AWD” Warning Light monitors the electronic
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
shift all-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after
engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means
5
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
that the all-wheel drive system is not functioning prop- Proper operation of all-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
erly and that service is required.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
transfer case.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SERV AWD Warning Light”
is illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
injury.
Because all-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause
damage to driveline components.
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
When operating your vehicle in LOW RANGE, the
engine speed is approximately three times that of the
AWD AUTO position at a given road speed. Take care not
to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
WARNING!
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
For additional information on the appropriate use of each Neutral (N)
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
Neutral – This range disengages both the front and rear
AWD Auto
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational
All-Wheel Drive Auto Range – This range sends power to
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further inforthe rear wheels. The all-wheel drive system will be
mation.
automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of
traction. Additional traction for varying road conditions. Shifting Procedure
LOW Range
NOTE:
All-Wheel Drive Low Range – This range provides low • If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have not been met, the transfer case will not shift.
speed all-wheel drive. Locks the front and rear driveThe position indicator light for the previous position will
shafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate
remain ON and the newly selected position indicator light
at the same speed. Additional traction and maximum
will continue to flash until all the requirements for the
pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do
selected position have been met. To retry a shift: return
not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
the control knob back to the original position, make
certain all shift requirements have been met, wait five
seconds and try the shift again.
5
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have been met, the current position indicator
light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the position indicator light
for the selected position will stop flashing and remain
ON.
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, rotate the AWD control switch to
the desired position.
AWD Auto To Low Range
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
NOTE: When shifting into or out of LOW RANGE some
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
Alternate Procedure
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. Use either of 2. With the ignition switch in ON/ RUN position and
the following procedures:
engine running, shift the transmission to Neutral.
3. Rotate the AWD control switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
NOTE:
NEUTRAL Shift Procedure
• If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift
or if they no longer are being met while the shift
attempt is in process, the desired position indicator
light will flash continuously while the original position
indicator light is ON, until all requirements have been
met.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop with the engine
running.
• The ignition switch must be in the RUN position for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator lights
to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the RUN
position, then the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold
the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector switch) for four seconds. The
light next to the N symbol will blink, indicating shift
in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid)
when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete. A “4WD
System in Neutral” message will display on the Driver
Information Display (DID). Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
5
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a “To
Tow Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral Shift Procedure in
Owners Manual” message will flash from the Driver
Information Display (DID). Refer to “Driver Information
Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Neutral Switch
5. Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to shift out of NEUTRAL.
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
ordinary cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
When To Use LOW Range — If Equipped
CAUTION!
Do not drive in 4WD-LOW Range on dry pavement;
driveline damage may result. 4WD-LOW Range
locks front and rear drivelines together and does not
allow for differential action between the front to rear
driveshafts. Driving in 4WD-LOW on pavement will
cause driveline binding; use only on wet or slippery
surfaces.
When off-road driving, shift to LOW for additional
traction. This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional
low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in Driving Through Water
excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
LOW range.
water, there are a number of precautions that must be
considered before entering the water.
5
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering,
as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving through water may cause damage that may not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must
drive through water, try to determine the depth and the
bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to
entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water
to minimize wave effects.
and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross
flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 in (23 cm). The
flowing water can erode the streambed, causing your
vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s)
that are downstream of your entry point to allow for
drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 in (51
cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave
effects. Maximum speed in 20 in (51 cm) of water is less
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle,
transfer case) to assure the fluids have not been contamiFlowing Water
nated. Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in appearance)
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm should be flushed/changed as soon as possible to prerun-off), avoid crossing until the water level recedes vent component damage.
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the transfer case to LOW. Use first
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
gear and LOW for very steep hills.
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
gear and shift the transfer case to LOW if necessary. Refer If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while
to “All-Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and Oper- climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop
ating” for further information. Do not shift to a lower and immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine,
gear than necessary to maintain forward motion. Over- and shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill,
revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will allowing the compression braking of the engine to help
regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to control
be lost.
vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads, beskidding the tires.
cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of
control.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
WARNING!
Hill Climbing
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion, or
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade,
never attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
(Continued)
5
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear. Never
back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission whenever possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill always
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
drive straight up or down.
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion can get any problems taken care of right away and have
by turning the front wheels slowly. This may provide a your vehicle ready when you need it.
fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually provide
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
traction to complete the climb.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
Traction Downhill
exhaust system for damage.
Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the transfer • Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
case into LOW range. Let the vehicle go slowly down the
required.
hill with all four wheels turning against engine compression drag. This will permit you to control the vehicle
speed and direction.
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
WARNING! (Continued)
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and • If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
propeller shafts.
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
correct the situation.
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
and cleaned as soon as possible.
POWER STEERING
3.6L Engine
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
(Continued)
Your vehicle is equipped with an electro-hydraulic power
steering system that will give you good vehicle response
and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces.
The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts
5
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
while parking and good feel while driving. If the electrohydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing power steering assist, then the
system will provide mechanical steering capability.
CAUTION!
Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electrically driven pump to reduce or stop power steering
assistance in order to prevent damage to the system.
Normal operation will resume once the system is
allowed to cool.
“Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the “POWER STEERING HOT” message and an icon
are displayed on the DID screen, it indicates that extreme
steering maneuvers may have occurred, which caused an
over temperature condition in the power steering system.
You will lose power steering assistance momentarily
until the over temperature condition no longer exists.
Once driving conditions are safe, then pull over and let
vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns off.
Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” message
and a flashing icon are displayed on the DID • Even if power steering assistance is no longer operascreen, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
taken to the dealer for service. It is likely the
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer to
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
and during parking maneuvers.
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for • Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
service.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
5.7L Engine
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
The standard power steering system will give you good
does not in any way damage the steering system.
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
WARNING!
steering capability if power assist is lost.
Continued operation with reduced power steering
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi- Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
CAUTION!
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
5
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
Parking Brake
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
switch in the ON position, the “Brake” Warning Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
5
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake” Warning Light will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, remove
the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake” Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses
normal capability, the remaining system will still function. However, there will be some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel
during application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake System
Warning Light.”
5
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM),
and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All five of these
systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
Also, your vehicle is equipped with Trailer Sway Control
(TSC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Ready Alert Braking, and
Rain Brake Support.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
Traction Control System (TCS)
Brake Assist System (BAS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability.
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similar to a limited-slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for further
information.
5
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or
other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions, and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
WARNING! (Continued)
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator” located in
the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator” also flashes
when the TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual the prevailing road conditions.
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
5
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
AUTO Range (All-Wheel Drive Models) Or
Two-Wheel Drive Models
On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in AWD
AUTO range and in two-wheel drive vehicles. Whenever
the vehicle is started or the transfer case (if equipped) is
shifted from AWD LOW range or NEUTRAL back to
AWD AUTO range, the ESC system will be in this “On”
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off”
mode for specific reasons as noted below.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
OFF” switch. When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS
portion of ESC, except for the BLD feature described in
The ESC system has two available operating modes in the TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESC Off
AWD AUTO range and two-wheel drive vehicles, and Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other stability
one operating mode in AWD LOW range.
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
features of ESC function normally. This mode is intended
to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel
conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESC on
again, momentarily press the “ESC OFF” switch. This
will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESC OFF” switch. Once the
situation requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial
Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the “ESC OFF” switch. This may be done
while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section), has been disabled and
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated.
When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
ESC OFF Switch
(Continued)
5
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys- will become active automatically once an excessively
tem is reduced.
swaying trailer is recognized. Note that TSC cannot stop
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the all trailers from swaying. Always use caution when
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight
recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in this secAWD Low Range (LOW)
tion for further information. When TSC is functioning,
Partial Off
the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will
flash, the engine power may be reduced and you may
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in AWD LOW
feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to
range. Whenever the vehicle is started in AWD LOW
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled
range, or the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from
when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
AWD AUTO range or NEUTRAL to AWD LOW range,
the ESC system will be in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backThe HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
WARNING!
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system
the intended direction of travel.
will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This
HSA Activation Criteria
could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
activate:
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
5
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
HSA
WARNING! (Continued)
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
when pulling a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releasing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
(Continued)
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
HSA Off
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done
using the Uconnect® Settings. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
function in the intermittent mode. When Rain Brake
Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
no driver interaction is required.
reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by ESC OFF Indicator Light
the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly,
Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow
when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON/
a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes.
RUN position. It should go out with the engine
Rain Brake Support
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
on the front brake rotors. It only functions when the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode, it does not speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
Ready Alert Braking
5
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo- • Each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
position, the ESC system will be ON even if it was
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
cycled off previously, except for when the vehicle is
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
started while in AWD LOW Range.
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acwhen it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
that caused the ESC activation.
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
off or full off.
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
5
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure comstandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
5
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)
tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
5
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
Tire And Loading Information Placard
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuaxles must not be exceeded. For further information on
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
5
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The followbe five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
650 lbs [295 kg]).
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
• For the following example, the combined weight of
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
capacity calculated in step 4.
(392 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
5
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
ride.
NOTE:
Tire Inflation Pressures
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the door.
vehicle to drift left or right.
5
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidepocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
wall.
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under- Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
inflated.
temperature changes.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
CAUTION!
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al- the Winter.
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
which could damage the valve stem.
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure outside temperature condition.
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
At least once a month:
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle Radial Ply Tires
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
WARNING!
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operatCombining radial ply tires with other types of tires
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
5
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Repair
Tire Types
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it All Season Tires — If Equipped
meets the following criteria:
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm). failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
5
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full Wheel — If Equipped
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
mode.
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
WARNING!
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” only. With these spares, do not drive more than
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/ 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
80D18 103M.
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
5
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
first opportunity.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
WARNING!
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Inspare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
first opportunity.
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
Tire Spinning
Tread Wear Indicators
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or to help you in determining when your tires should be
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop- replaced.
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
5
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle mainbecomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
WARNING!
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of
this manual for more information relating to the Load
Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Rear Tires Only
• Due to limited clearance, the THULE XG-12 PRO
traction device or equivalent is recommended on
P265/60R18 or 265/50R20 tires.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
(Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road
5
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
NOTE: The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will
automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the
correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
Tire Rotation
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
shown in the following diagram.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
the proper pressure.
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
following components:
three-hour period. Refer to “Tires – General Informa• Receiver Module
tion” in “Starting and Operating” for information on
how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages, normal and there should be no adjustment for this
which display in the Driver Information Display increased pressure.
(DID), and a graphic displaying tire pressures
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold tire placard pressure.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
5
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28
psi (193 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
Light will still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
cold tire pressure value.
The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the
CAUTION!
updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph • The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
(24 km/h) to receive this information.
been established for the tire size equipped on your
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
(parked for more than three hours) tire placard pressure
of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(Continued)
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
cold tire placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure
warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be
increased to the recommended cold tire pressure in order
for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be
turned off.
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
CAUTION! (Continued)
damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to your authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
5
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
the proper pressure.
readings to the Receiver Module.
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the value(s) with the low tire(s) displayed in a different color.
Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Underfollowing components:
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• Receiver Module
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
in PSI, BAR or kPa.
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Driver Information Display
(DID), and a graphic displaying tire pressures
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be activated, when one or more of the
four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the
DID will display a ⬙Tire Low⬙ message, an ⬙Inflate to
XXX⬙ message and a graphic display of the pressure
Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display
5
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is in a different color on the
graphic display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire
pressure displayed in the ⬙Inflate to XXX⬙ message.
Service Tpm System Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The DID will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSNOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may TEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) message is then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order in place of the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The system will automatically update, the graphic dis- If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
play of the pressure value(s) will return to its original providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
color and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s) have been Light will no longer flash, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this infor- displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by
mation.
any of the following:
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to The DID will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
TPM sensors.
fault is detected possibly related to an incorrect sensor
location fault. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
message is then followed by a graphic display, with
that affects radio wave signals.
pressure values still shown. This indicates the pressure
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel values are still being received from the TPM Sensors but
housings.
they may not be located in the correct vehicle position.
However, the system still needs to be serviced as long as
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message exists.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
5
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in the
spare tire. The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire
pressure. If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition switch cycle, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON, a chime will
sound, and the DID will still display a pressure value in
the different color graphic display and an ⬙Inflate to XXX
kPa⬙ message will be displayed. After driving the vehicle
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the
DID will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for
five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value. For each subsequent ignition switch
cycle, a chime will sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the DID will display a ⬙SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for five seconds and then dis-
play dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. Once you
repair or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on
the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the TPMS will
update automatically.
In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will turn OFF and the graphic in the DID will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
General Information
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and 3.6L Engine — If Equipped
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
This engine is designed to meet all emis(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
sions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when us(2) This device must accept any interference received,
ing high-quality unleaded “Regular” gasoincluding interference that may cause undesired operaline having an octane rating of 87 as specition.
fied by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher octane
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved “Premium” gasoline will not provide any benefit over
by the party responsible for compliance could void the “Regular” gasoline in these engines.
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considThis engine is designed to meet all emisering service for the vehicle.
sions regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when us- Reformulated Gasoline
ing high-quality unleaded gasoline having Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
an octane range of 87 to 89 as specified by burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane “Plus” gaso- Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are speline is recommended for optimum performance and fuel cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and imeconomy.
prove air quality.
5.7L Engine — If Equipped
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide ima cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard proved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxyWarranty.
genates such as ethanol.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should
clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than
10% ethanol.
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing up to 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% ethanol
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
5
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
fuel.
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline Fuel System Cautions
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
CAUTION!
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline performance:
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content • The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perof gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
formance and damage the emissions control systherefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
tem.
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
and California reformulated gasoline.
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
Materials Added To Fuel
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
(Continued)
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
MMT In Gasoline
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
CAUTION! (Continued)
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
(Continued)
5
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a
yellow gas cap can operate on E-85.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15%
unleaded gasoline.
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit or products that can cause spark in or
near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube
cap (gas cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a
cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame.
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
Fuel Requirements
NOTE:
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on • Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
unleaded gasoline with any octane rating, or solely E-85
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and
fuel, or any mixture of these fuels.
rough idle following start up may be experienced even
if the above recommendations are followed, especially
For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
between E-85 and unleaded gasoline.
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
• Add 5 gallons (19 Liters) or more when refueling.
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
• Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
additive, such as MOPAR® Injector Cleanup or
least 5 miles (8 km).
Techron may be used.
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or driveability problems during warm up. Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
When switching fuel types:
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR® engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
5
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
FCA US Material Standard MS-6395. It is recommended
that engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of Material Standard MS-6395 be used.
MS-6395 contains additional requirements, developed
during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to FCA US LLC engines.
Starting
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be
experienced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/kilometers per
liter and the driving range will decrease by approximately 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol.
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time
Ethanol compatible service components are required.
it takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
CAUTION!
until the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be
improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel.
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may compatible components can damage your vehicle.
improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the
ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect drivability.
5
ADDING FUEL
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located under
the headlamp switch).
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
2. Open the fuel filler door.
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
pipe seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refueling.
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
Fuel Filler Door
6. Wait 5 seconds before removing the fuel nozzle to
allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel
door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the
door.
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
• Most gas cans will not open the flapper door.
• A funnel is provided to open the flapper door to allow
emergency refueling with a gas can.
• Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area.
• Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel
nozzle.
• Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper door
open.
• Pour fuel into funnel opening.
• Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
putting back in the spare tire storage area.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
5
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Push the inboard edge of the left storage bin to the
center, this will pop up the outboard edge.
3. Grab popped up outboard edge with other hand to
disengage snaps.
4. Remove the storage bin.
Release Cable
5. Pull the release cable to open the fuel door, push the
release cable back to the home position to re-seat the NOTE: If the fuel door does not latch after the manual
fuel door latch to the closed position.
release cable has been activated, the actuator latch should
be manually returned to the closed position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle components sometimes specified by purchasers for inincluding driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehiThe label also specifies maximum capacities of front and cle’s GVWR.
5
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
added.
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Loading
Tire Size
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
listed.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commerInflation Pressure
cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. WeighCurb Weight
ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
Rim Size
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed TRAILER TOWING
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
In this section you will find safety tips and information
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
the brakes operate.
and safely as possible.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
5
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
WARNING! (Continued)
you use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could
lose control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem- The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and and trailer when weighed in combination.
ready for operation⬙ condition.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle CertificaWARNING!
tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lbs (2 267 kg) or information.
more, it is mandatory to use a weight-distributing
hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and
the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen
any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
hitch ball by the trailer. The recommended tongue weight individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
is 10% to 15% of the vehicle’s GTW for a conventional attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
hitch. You must consider this as part of the load on your Weight-Carrying Hitch
vehicle.
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
Frontal Area
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
5
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
5
520 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
Engine
3.6L
3.6L
3.6L
3.6L
5.7L
5.7L
GCWR (Gross
Max. GTW
Combined Wt.
Frontal Area
(Gross Trailer
Rating)
Wt.)
RWD Light Duty
8,900 lbs
40 sq ft
3,500 lbs
Cooling
(4,037 kg)
(3.72 sq m)
(1,588 kg)
RWD
11,600 lbs
40 sq ft
6,200 lbs
(5,262 kg)
(3.72 sq m)
(2,812 kg)
AWD Light
8,900 lbs
40 sq ft
3,500 lbs
Duty Cooling
(4,037 kg)
(3.72 sq m)
(1,588 kg)
AWD
11,600 lbs
40 sq ft
6,200 lbs
(5,262 kg)
(3.72 sq m)
(2,812 kg)
RWD
13,100 lbs
60 sq ft
7,400 lbs
(5,942 kg)
(5.57 sq m)
(3,357 kg)
AWD
13,100 lbs
60 sq ft
7,200 lbs
(5,942 kg)
(5.57 sq m)
(3,266 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Model
Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt. (See
Note)
350 lbs (159 kg)
620 lbs (281 kg)
350 lbs (159 kg)
620 lbs (281 kg)
740 lbs (336 kg)
720 lbs (327 kg)
STARTING AND OPERATING 521
NOTE:
• The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part
of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information. The addition of passengers and cargo
may require reducing trailer tongue load and Gross
Trailer Weight (GTW). Redistributing cargo (to the
trailer) may be necessary to avoid exceeding Rear
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of 3,900 lbs (1
769 kg).
• Vehicles not factory equipped with trailer tow package
are limited to 3,500 lbs (350 lbs tongue weight).
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal — If
Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer hitch receiver cover, this must be removed to access the trailer
hitch receiver (if equipped). This cover is located at the
bottom center of the rear fascia.
1. Turn the two locking retainers located at the bottom of
the hitch receiver cover a 1/4 turn counterclockwise
and pull bottom of the hitch receiver cover outward
(towards you).
5
522 STARTING AND OPERATING
Hitch Receiver Cover Retainers
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover
2 — Locking Retainers
Hitch Receiver Cover
To reinstall the cover after towing repeat the procedure in
reverse order.
NOTE: Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receiver
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward (towards you) cover in the bumper fascia prior to installation.
then downwards to disengage the tabs located at the
top of the hitch receiver cover to remove.
STARTING AND OPERATING 523
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in the front
of the trailer. This places 10% of the GTW on the tow
hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or
heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely
side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle
and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the
cause of many trailer collisions. Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your trailer hitch.
5
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle
• The weight of the driver and all passengers
524 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and Loading Information Placard” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Towing Requirements
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recomPerform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
mended.
Schedule”. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
STARTING AND OPERATING 525
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
(Continued)
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
(Continued)
5
526 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the proper
tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a
Towing Requirements — Tires
higher load carrying capacity will not increase the
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
STARTING AND OPERATING 527
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
(Continued)
5
528 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
Four-Pin Connector
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles 1 — Female Pins
wiring harness.
2 — Male Pin
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
STARTING AND OPERATING 529
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer up in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use the
AutoStick shift control to manually select a lower gear.
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions, will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
5
530 STARTING AND OPERATING
AutoStick
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
• When using the AutoStick shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and Cooling System
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if To reduce potential for engine and transmission overthe desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or heating, take the following actions:
“3” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
City Driving
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as neces- When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transsary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road Highway Driving
conditions allow.
Reduce speed.
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
Air Conditioning
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
Turn off temporarily.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 531
SNOW PLOW
Snow plows, winches, and other aftermarket equipment
should not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The
airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the
front end structure. The airbags could deploy unexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a collision.
WARNING!
Do not add a snow plow, winches, or any other
aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle.
This could adversely affect the functioning of the
airbag system and you could be injured.
5
532 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Wheels
OFF the
Ground
Flat Tow
NONE
Dolly Tow
Front
On Trailer
Rear
ALL
RearWheel
Drive
Models
NOT ALLOWED
All-Wheel Drive Models
With Single-Speed Transfer
Case
All-Wheel Drive Models With
Two-Speed Transfer Case
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
OK
NOT ALLOWED
• See Instructions
• Transmission in PARK
• Transfer case in NEUTRAL
(N)
• Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
OK
STARTING AND OPERATING 533
NOTE: When recreational towing your vehicle, always 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state
5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following
and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
details.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towRecreational Towing — Rear-Wheel Drive Models
ing, to secure the front wheels in the straight position.
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
CAUTION!
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is
allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground.
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive Models
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
(Single-Speed Transfer Case)
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the transmission not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the transfer case.
into PARK.
5
534 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or
vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the
ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive Models
(Two-Speed Transfer Case)
The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) and
the transmission must be in PARK for recreational towing. The NEUTRAL (N) selection button is adjacent to the
transfer case selector switch. Shifts into and out of
transfer case NEUTRAL (N) can take place with the
selector switch in any mode position.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT dolly tow any AWD vehicle. Towing with
only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear)
will cause severe transmission and/or transfer case
damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the
ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the
transfer case.
• The transmission must be in PARK for recreational
towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting Into NEUTRAL(N)” to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL
(N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 535
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
5
CAUTION!
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
(Continued)
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with the engine
running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
536 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold
the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector switch) for four seconds. The
light behind the N symbol will blink, indicating shift
in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid)
when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete. A “FOUR
WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” message will
appear in the Driver Information Display (DID). Refer
to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
5. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N)
light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
6. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
7. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
STARTING AND OPERATING 537
8. Shift the transmission back into NEUTRAL.
9. Firmly apply the parking brake.
12. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
13. Release the parking brake.
10. With the transmission and transfer case in NEUTRAL, press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP NOTE:
button until the engine turns off. Turning the engine
• Steps 1 through 3 are requirements that must be met
off will automatically place the transmission in
before pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
PARK.
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
If any of these requirements are not met before press11. Press the ENGINE STOP/START button again (withing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
out pressing the brake pedal), if needed, to turn the
during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will
ignition switch to the OFF position.
flash continuously until all requirements are met or
until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
NEUTRAL (N) and the engine running. With the
transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) ensure that the engine
is OFF before shifting the transmission into PARK.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
5
538 STARTING AND OPERATING
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off,
release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold
8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the
the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (lotransfer case will shift to the position indicated by the
cated by the selector switch) for one second.
selector switch.
STARTING AND OPERATING 539
9. Shift the transmission into PARK and turn the engine NOTE:
OFF.
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
10. Release the brake pedal.
before pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
If any of these requirements are not met before press12. Start the engine.
ing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will
13. Press and hold the brake pedal.
flash continuously until all requirements are met or
14. Release the parking brake.
until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
15. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the brake • The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .543
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .543
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .546
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
䡵 CAP-LESS FUEL FILL FUNNEL . . . . . . . . . . . .561
䡵 JUMP-STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
䡵 EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED . .568
6
542 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
▫ Rear Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .573
▫ All-Wheel Drive Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 543
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
switch bank just above the climate controls.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • On the highways — slow down.
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
speed while maintaining the motion of the vehicle
with the brakes.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for an impending overheat condition:
other motorists.
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
may wear down your battery.
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
6
544 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT
(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 545
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
130 Ft-Lbs (176 N·m)
M14 x 1.50
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
22 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
6
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
546 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
Torque Patterns
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 547
WARNING! (Continued)
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located
in rear cargo area, below the load floor.
6
Jack Storage Location
Rotate the plastic thumb screw on the end of the jack to
loosen the jack and remove from the bracket.
548 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
center-rear of the cargo floor area, just inside the liftgate
opening.
Thumb Screw Location
Spare Tire Stowage
The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by
means of a cable winch mechanism. To remove or stow
the spare, use the jack handle/lug wrench connected to
the square socket extension to rotate the “spare tire
drive” nut. The nut is located under a plastic cover at the
Spare Tire Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 549
CAUTION!
Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down.
Impact type tools can damage the winch mechanism.
Spare Tire Removal
1. Remove the jack tools from the bag.
2. Raise the rubber mat and remove the plug from
storage compartment floor.
3. Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut. Use
the lug wrench handle and extension to completely
lower the spare tire. Keep turning the handle until the
winch stops.
6
Lowering/Raising Spare Tire
550 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Slide the tire out from under the vehicle and rotate it 5. Spread the retaining tabs on the plastic plate and pull
vertically behind the rear bumper.
the metal stamping toward you to release it from the
plastic plate.
Spare Tire
Tab Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 551
6. Slide the metal stamping up the steel extension tube
and winch cable. Rotate the metal stamping and push
it through the hole in the plastic plate and wheel.
6
Releasing Protective Plate
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
7. Pinch the three short and two long tubes to remove the
areas.
protective plate from the steel spare wheel.
Sleeve And Cable
552 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire,
block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set the automatic
transmission in PARK.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 553
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
6
554 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left, one turn, while the wheel is
still on the ground.
lift point symbol on the sill molding. Do not raise the
vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
2. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
Jack And Tool Assembly
3. For the front axle, place the jack on the body flange
just behind the front tire as indicated by the triangular
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 555
6
Front Jack Location
4. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on the rear
tie-down bracket, just forward of the rear tire (as
indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill
molding). Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure
the jack is fully engaged.
Lift Point On Sill Molding
556 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Install the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 557
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counterclockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. Refer to Torque
Specifications in this section for proper lug nut torque.
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized
dealer or at a service station.
Mounting Spare Tire
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
10. Push out the small center cap using the jack tool from
inside the aluminum road wheel and position the
wheel behind the rear bumper with the “beauty side”
facing rearward.
6
558 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
11. Insert the two long tubes on the plastic protective
plate in the lug holes of the road wheel. Push the end
of the winch’s cable, spring, steel sleeve and stamped
cone shape wheel plate though the road wheel and
protective plate.
“Beauty Side”
NOTE: The plastic plate will prevent the road wheel from
being scratched when sliding it under the vehicle.
Installing Winch
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 559
12. Slide the road wheel on the ground using the protec- NOTE: Double check to ensure the tire is snug against the
tive plate until it is directly under the winch and underbody of the vehicle. Damage to the winch cable
between the rear bumper and exhaust system heat may result if the vehicle is driven with the tire loose.
shields. Raise the tire by turn the lug wrench on the
winch extension clockwise until it clicks/ratchets
WARNING!
three times to make sure the cable is tight.
Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down.
Impact-type tools may damage the winch mechanism.
13. Lower the jack to the fully closed position. Return the
tools to the proper positions in the tool bag. Fold the
flap on the tool bag under the tools and roll the tools
in the bag underneath the others. Use the Velcro
straps to secure the tool bag to the jack with the lug
wrench on the forward side of the jack. Expand the
jack on the bracket by turning the thumb screw
clockwise until it is tight to prevent rattles.
Road Wheel Installed In Spare Location
6
560 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
14. Reinstall the plastic plug into the floor of the cargo Road Tire Installation
area. Roll up and store the Jack, Tool Kit and Tire
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
Changing Instructions. Reinstall the cover for the jack
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
in the rear storage bin.
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
15. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as
lug nuts.
soon as possible and properly secure the spare tire,
jack and tool kit.
WARNING!
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Refer to Torque Specifications for proper lug nut
torque.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 561
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
CAP-LESS FUEL FILL FUNNEL
The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is located with
the jack and tire changing tools. If your vehicle is out of
fuel and an auxiliary fuel can is needed, insert the funnel
into the filler neck and proceed to fill the vehicle.
For more information on the Cap-Less Fuel System refer
to “Adding Fuel” in “Starting And Operating ” in this
manual.
6
Fuel Funnel
562 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JUMP-STARTING
CAUTION!
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located under the passenger’s front seat. There are remote locations located under
the hood to assist in jump-starting.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 563
WARNING!
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
NOTE: Be sure that the disconnected ends of the cables
do not touch while still connected to the other vehicle.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
6
564 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri- Jump-Starting Procedure
cal accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post. Pull upward on the cover to remove
it.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
NOTE: Make sure at all times that unused ends of
jumper cables are not contacting each other or either
vehicle while making connections.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 565
Connecting The Jumper Cables
WARNING! (Continued)
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with 6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
the discharged battery.
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and
(Continued)
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the remote negative (-) post of the discharged
vehicle.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
6
566 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
(+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
you should have the battery and charging system tested steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
at your authorized dealer.
and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
(Continued)
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
more than two seconds, you must push the brake pedal
to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 567
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
(Continued)
6
568 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious injury.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be
one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the
vehicle. The rear hook will be located on the driver’s side
of the vehicle.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 569
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
2. Open the center console and locate the Manual Park
Release cover, remove it by snapping the cover away
from the console hinges.
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will
allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by
the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery),
a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
6
Manual Park Release Cover
570 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, push the metal 4. While the metal latch is in the open position, simultalatch in towards the tether strap.
neously pull upwards on the tether strap until the
lever clicks and latches in the released position. The
transmission is now out of PARK and the vehicle can
be moved.
Release Latch
Released Position
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 571
CAUTION!
Closing the armrest while the Manual Park Release is
activated may damage the Manual Park Release
mechanism, the transmission, and/or the armrest.
NOTE: To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintentionally, firmly apply the parking brake.
To Disengage the Manual Park Release Lever:
1. To disengage the Manual Park Release apply tension
upward while pushing the release latch towards the
tether to unlock the lever.
6
Release Latch
572 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Once the tension has been released and the lever has
been unlocked be sure it is stowed properly and locks
into position.
Stowed Position
NOTE: Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it back
in place.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 573
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles
may also be towed as described under “Recreational
Towing” in the “Starting and Operating” section.
Towing
Condition
Wheels OFF the
Ground
Rear-Wheel Drive
Models
Flat Tow
NONE
If Transmission Is
Operable:
• Transmission
in
NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h)
max speed
• 30 miles (48 km)
max distance
All-Wheel Drive
Models With SingleSpeed Transfer Case
NOT ALLOWED
All-Wheel Drive
Models With TwoSpeed Transfer Case
See Instructions:
• Transmission
in
PARK
• Transfer case in
NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
6
574 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Towing
Condition
Wheels OFF the
Ground
Rear-Wheel Drive
Models
Wheel Lift
or Dolly
Tow
Front
If Transmission Is
Operable:
• Transmission
in
NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h)
max speed
• 30 miles (48 km)
max distance
OK
BEST METHOD
Flatbed
Rear
ALL
All-Wheel Drive
Models With SingleSpeed Transfer Case
NOT ALLOWED
All-Wheel Drive
Models With TwoSpeed Transfer Case
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip- vehicles under tow must be observed.
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 575
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) Rear Wheel Drive Models
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
position, not the ACC position.
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle’s battery is If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmisdischarged, refer to “Manual Park Release” in this section sion is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK wheels on the ground) with the transmission in NEUfor towing.
TRAL. Speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) and the
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do
not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
30 miles (48 km) with rear wheels on the ground can
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 30
6
576 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
miles (48 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed,
or with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on a
towing dolly, or (when using a suitable steering wheel
stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the straight position)
with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the
ground.
wheels on the ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL and the transmission is in PARK. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for detailed
instructions.
Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer case have
no NEUTRAL position, and therefore must be towed will
all four wheels OFF the ground.
All-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised
and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer
case is operable, the vehicles with a two-speed transfer
case may be towed (in the forward direction, with ALL
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur
if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .579
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . .580
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . .581
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .584
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
7
578 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
▫ Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
▫ Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
▫ Rear Tail, Stop And Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . .632
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
▫ Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
▫ High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (Bi-Xenon)
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
▫ Bi-Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped . . . . . .630
▫ Rear Liftgate Mounted Back-up Lamps . . . . . .632
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . .632
▫ Rear License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 579
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
6
7
8
9
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
— Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
— Engine Coolant Reservoir
580 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1
2
3
4
5
— Remote Jump Start Terminals
— Engine Oil Fill
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
8 — Coolant Pressure Cap
9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
10 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 581
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
7
582 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
ready for testing.
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
happen:
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
not proceed to the I/M station.
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
following:
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
position or start the engine. This means that your
not crank or start the engine.
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed
to the I/M station.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 583
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal attempting any procedure yourself.
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine penalties being assessed against you.
running.
WARNING!
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
7
584 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
CAUTION! (Continued)
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check
the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 585
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five Change Engine Oil
minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informamaintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the tion.
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inthe bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve
top of the safe zone on these engines.
months, whichever occurs first.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS-6395.
7
586 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engine
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA US
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®, Shell
This symbol means that the oil has Helix® or equivalent is recommended for all operating
been certified by the American temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
Petroleum Institute (API). The starting and vehicle fuel economy.
manufacturer only recommends
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
API Certified engine oils.
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W- engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 en- partment” illustration in this section.
gine oils.
NOTE: MOPAR® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to
FCA US Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®,
CAUTION!
Shell Helix® or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 587
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent such as
should not be used.
Pennzoil® or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low tem- Materials Added To Engine Oil
perature starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the adThe engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart- performance may be impaired by supplemental addiment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa- tives.
tion.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
operation of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to “Fuel indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
Saver Technology – If Equipped” in “Starting And Oper- environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
ating” for further information.
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
Engine Oil Viscosity — 5.7L Engine
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
7
588 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in the “Mainte- The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
nance Schedules” section for the proper maintenance varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
intervals.
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 589
Maintenance-Free Battery
WARNING! (Continued)
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
(Continued)
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
(Continued)
7
590 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 591
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf
— If Equipped
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a
low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service
be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (A/C Air
Filter)
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system maintenance intervals.
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
7
592 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not remove the A/C air filter while the ignition
is in the ON/RUN position or personal injury may
result.
• Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove compartment. Perform the following procedure
to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 593
2. There are glove compartment travel stops on both
sides of the glove compartment door, partially close
the glove compartment door and push inward to
release the glove compartment travel stop on one side
and repeat this procedure for the opposite side.
3. Pull the right hand side of the glove compartment
door toward the rear of the vehicle to disengage the
glove compartment door from its hinges.
NOTE: When disengaging the glove compartment door
from its hinges, there will be some resistance.
4. With the glove compartment door loose, remove the
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
glove compartment tension tether and tether clip by
sliding the clip toward the face of the glove compart- 1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Door
ment door and lifting the clip out of glove compartment door.
5. Remove the filter cover by disengaging the retaining
tab and mid way snap that secures the filter cover to
the HVAC housing. Disengage the mid way snap by
7
594 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
pulling the door outward. Unhinge the filter cover on 6. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the right side to fully remove the cover.
the housing.
7. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
A/C Air Filter Cover
1 — Retaining Tab
2 — Mid Way Snap
3 — Filter Cover Hinge
8. Reinstall the glove compartment door on the glove
compartment door hinge and reattach the glove compartment tension tether by inserting the tether clip in
the glove compartment and sliding the clip away from
the face of the glove compartment door.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 595
9. Push the door to the near closed position to reengage The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
the glove compartment travel stops.
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
NOTE: Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Body Lubrication
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulatailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
tions of salt or road film.
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after from a dry windshield.
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
components to ensure proper function. When performing petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
7
596 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
liftgate glass.
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Pivot Cap
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully upward unless the pivot cap is raised first.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the liftgate glass.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 597
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it 4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press
blade holder.
the wiper blade until it snaps into place.
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
place.
Adding Washer Fluid
This vehicle is equipped with a Driver Information
Display (DID), the DID will indicate when the washer
fluid level is low. When the sensor detects a low fluid
level, the windshield will light on the vehicle graphic
outline and the “WASHER FLUID LOW” message will be
displayed.
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Wiper Blade
Blade Pivot Pin
Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade Holder
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is
located in the engine compartment, be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
7
598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
(Continued)
7
600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control • Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
against you.
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe Cooling System
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
WARNING!
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specificaYou or others can be badly burned by hot engine
tions, should be obtained immediately.
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam- you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
age:
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
motion.
Engine Coolant Checks
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
vehicle.
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS.90032).
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
7
602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant NOTE:
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Maproperly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
terial Standard MS.90032.
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
local authorized dealer.
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentra• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recomtions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34° F
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
(−37° C) are anticipated.
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionOAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
possible.
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
7
604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System Pressure Cap
WARNING! (Continued)
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
WARNING!
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding spills immediately.
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
Coolant Level
system is hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant Points To Remember
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
indicated on the bottle.
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is from the front of the engine compartment. This is norno need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporpoint or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
a month.
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets • Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing.
7
606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under the hood service, or immediately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system
failure.
The brake master cylinder has a plastic reservoir. On the
outboard side of the reservoir, there is a “MAX” dot and
a “MIN” dot. The fluid level must be kept within these
two dots. Do not add fluid above the MAX mark, because
leakage may occur at the cap.
With disc brakes, the fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check
should be conducted.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
(Continued)
7
608 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
The front axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8 in
(3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons The rear axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8 in (3
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 609
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
Adding Fluid
Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the hole,
when the vehicle is in a level position.
Drain
Selection Of Lubricant
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug. RecomUse only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintain- 25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
Transfer Case
Fluid Level Check
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the transfer case assembly should
be inspected. If oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid
CAUTION!
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
7
610 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
used.
adversely affect seals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 611
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools.
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. HowIf you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
disassembled for any reason.
7
612 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
What Causes Corrosion?
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
The following maintenance recommendations will enable • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your veyou to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
resistance built into your vehicle.
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 613
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu- Special Care
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
and Tar Remover to remove.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
7
614 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permapackaged and sealed.
nently damage this finish and such damage is not cov• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to this finish.
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 615
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Interior Care
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man- carpeting.
ner:
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
with a clean, dry towel.
leather upholstery.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
protectants on Stain Repel products.
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
7
616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 617
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
clean damp cloth.
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win- 2. Dry with a soft cloth.
dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows
Seat Belt Maintenance
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a
directly on the mirror.
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are cloth.
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
buckles do not work properly.
Glass Surfaces
7
618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A
description of each fuse and component may be stamped
on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of each
fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to
the following chart.
7
Power Distribution Center
Cavity
F03
F05
F06
Cartridge Fuse
60 Amp Yellow
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
Micro Fuse
–
–
–
Description
Radiator Fan
Compressor for Air Suspension - If Equipped
Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control
Pump
620 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F07
F08
F09
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F17
F19
F20
F22
F23
F24
F25
Cartridge Fuse
40 Amp Green
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
Micro Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Description
Starter Solenoid
Emission Sensors (Diesel engine only)
Diesel Fuel Heater (Diesel engine only)
Body Controller / Exterior Lighting #2
Trailer Tow Electric Brake - If Equipped
Body Controller #3 / Power Locks
Blower Motor Front
Body Controller #4 / Interior Lights #2
Headlamp Washer- If Equipped
Headrest Solenoid- If Equipped
Passenger Door Module
Engine Control Module
Interior Lights #1
Driver Door Module
Front Wipers
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 621
Cavity
F26
Cartridge Fuse
30 Amp Pink
Micro Fuse
–
F28
F29
F30
F32
F34
F35
F36
F37
F38
F39
F40
20 Amp Blue
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
25 Amp Clear
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
F42
–
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Anti-lock Brakes/Stability Control Module/
Valves
Trailer Tow Backup Lights - If Equipped
Trailer Tow Parking Lights - If Equipped
Trailer Tow Receptacle - If Equipped
Drive Train Control Module
Slip Differential Control
Sunroof - If Equipped
Rear Defroster
Rear Blower Motor - If Equipped
Power Inverter 115V AC - If Equipped
Power Liftgate - If Equipped
Daytime Running Lights/Headlamp Leveling
Horn
7
622 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F44
F46
F49
F50
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
F51
–
15 Amp Blue
F52
F53
–
–
5 Amp Tan
20 Amp Yellow
F55
F56
F57
F59
F60
–
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
Description
Diagnostic Port
Tire Pressure Monitor - If Equipped
Integrated Central Stack / Climate Control
Air Suspension Control Module - If
Equipped
Ignition Node Module / Keyless Ignition /
Steering Column Lock
Battery Sensor
Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights - If
Equipped
DTV / DSRC
Additional Content (Diesel engine only)
HID Headlamps LH - If Equipped
Purging Pump (Diesel engine only)
Transmission Control Module
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 623
Cavity
F61
Cartridge Fuse
–
Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red
F62
F63
F64
F66
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
25 Amp Clear
10 Amp Red
F67
–
15 Amp Blue
F68
F69
F70
F71
F73
F74
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
30 Amp Green
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Transmission Control Module/PM Sensor
(Diesel engine only)
Air Conditioning Clutch
Ignition Coils (Gas), Urea Heater (Diesel)
Fuel Injectors / Powertrain
Sunroof / Passenger Window Switches /
Rain Sensor
CD / DVD / Bluetooth Hands-free Module If Equipped
Rear Wiper Motor
Spotlight Feed - If Equipped
Fuel Pump Motor
Audio Amplifier
HID Headlamp RH - If Equipped
Brake Vacuum Pump - If Equipped
7
624 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F76
F77
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
F78
–
10 Amp Red
F80
–
10 Amp Red
F81
F82
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
F83
F84
F85
F86
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
Description
Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control
Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle Disconnect Module
Engine Control Module / Electric Power
Steering - If Equipped
Universal Garage Door Opener / Compass /
Anti-Intrusion Module
Trailer Tow Right Turn/Stop Lights
Steering Column Control Module/ Cruise
Control
Fuel Door
Switch Bank/Instrument Cluster
Airbag Module
Airbag Module
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 625
Cavity
F87
Cartridge Fuse
–
Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red
F88
F90/F91
F92
F93
F94
F95
F96
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
F97
–
20 Amp Yellow
F98
F99
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
Description
Air Suspension – If Equipped / Trailer Tow
/ Steering Column Control Module
Instrument Panel Cluster
Power Outlet (Rear seats) Selectable
Rear Console Lamp - If Equipped
Cigar Lighter
Shifter / Transfer Case Module
Rear Camera / ParkSense®
Rear Seat Heater Switch / Flashlamp Charger - If Equipped
Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering Wheel
- If Equipped
Front Heated Seats - If Equipped
Climate Control / Driver Assistance Systems
Module
7
626 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F100
F101
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
F103
–
10 Amp Red
F104
–
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Active Damping - If Equipped
Electrochromatic Mirror/Smart High Beams If Equipped
Cabin Heater (Diesel Engine Only)/Rear
HVAC
Power Outlets (Instrument Panel/Center
Console)
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 627
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
You may:
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
VEHICLE STORAGE
Glove Box Lamp
Grab Handle Lamp
Overhead Console Reading Lamps
Visor Vanity Lamp
Rear Cargo Lamp
Underpanel Courtesy Lamps
Bulb Number
194
L002825W5W
VT4976
V26377
214–2
906
7
628 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Instrument Cluster (General Illumination)
Telltale/Hazard Lamp
Bulb Number
103
74
Exterior Bulbs
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Xenon) Headlamps
Low Beam/High Beam/Daytime Running Lamp
(DRL) Bi-Halogen Headlamps (Base)
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Halogen) Headlamps
(Uplevel)
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (Base)
Front Turn Signal Lamps (Uplevel & Premium)
Front Park Lamp/Daytime Running Lamp (Uplevel &
Premium)
Front Side Marker Lamps
Bulb Number
D3S (Service at Authorized Dealer)
HIR2LL
HIR2LL
3157NAK
3157NAK
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 629
Front Fog Lamps
Rear Tail Lamps/Sidemarker Lamps
Rear Stop/Turn Signal Lamps
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps
Rear Backup Lamps
Rear License Lamps
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
Bulb Number
H11
(Serviced at Authorized
(Serviced at Authorized
(Serviced at Authorized
921 (W16W)
(Serviced at Authorized
(Serviced at Authorized
Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (Bi-Xenon)
— If Equipped
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off. Because of this, you should not
attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself. If a
headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an authorized
dealer for service.
7
630 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the
headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
2. Turn the access cap located on the wheel liner counterclockwise to remove from liner.
3. Locate the headlamp bulb access cap through the
opening in the wheel liner.
4. Firmly grasp the access cap and rotate counterclockwise to remove lamp housing.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis- 5. Firmly grasp the low/high beam bulb and connector
assembly and rotate counterclockwise to remove from
charge (HID) headlamps, when the headlamps are
housing.
turned on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 6. Disconnect the electrical connector and then connect
seconds, as the system charges.
the replacement bulb.
Bi-Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped
7. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
headlamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock in
1. Turn the steering wheel to the left to replace the bulb
place.
from the right hand lamp, or to the right to replace the
bulb from the left hand lamp.
8. Install the bulb access cap in the headlamp housing
and rotate clockwise to lock it in place.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 631
9. Install the access cap in the wheel liner and rotate
clockwise to lock it in place.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Turn Signal
1. Open the hood.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Fog Lamps
1. Reach through the cutout in the splash shield and
rotate the bulb’s electrical connector one-quarter turn
counterclockwise and remove it from the fog lamp
housing.
2. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turn counter2. Remove the bulb from the connector and install the
clockwise to remove from housing.
replacement bulb.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
3. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the fog
bulb.
lamp housing and rotate the connector one-quarter
turn clockwise to lock it in place.
7
632 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If
the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
• Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may
overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket
or the lamp wiring.
Rear Tail, Stop And Turn Signal Lamps
3. Back-up lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s) counter clockwise.
4. Remove/replace bulb(s).
5. Reinstall the socket(s)
6. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The center high-mounted stop lamp is an LED assembly.
See your authorized dealer for replacement.
Rear License Lamp
The rear tail, stop, and turn signal lamps are LED. See The rear license lamps are LED. See your authorized
your authorized dealer for replacement.
dealer for replacement.
Rear Liftgate Mounted Back-up Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the
lower trim from the liftgate.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 633
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L and 5.7L Engines
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000
Mile Formula or equivalent) – Without Trailer Tow Package
3.6L Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000
Mile Formula or equivalent) – With Trailer Tow Package
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) – Without Trailer Tow Package
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) – With Trailer Tow Package
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled
U.S
Metric
25 Gallons
94 Liters
6 Quarts
7 Quarts
5.6 Liters
6.6 Liters
10.4 Quarts
9.9 Liters
7
11 Quarts
10.4 Liters
15.4 Quarts
14.6 Liters
16 Quarts
15.2 Liters
to MAX level.
634 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000
Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®,
Pennzoil®, Shell Helix® or equivalent. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®,
Pennzoil®, Shell Helix® or equivalent. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 635
Component
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use a MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs.
87 Octane.
89 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable.
7
636 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 637
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Transfer Case – 3.6L Engine
Transfer Case – 5.7L Engine
Axle Differential (Front-Rear)
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir – 3.6L Engine
Power Steering Reservoir – 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only Mopar® ZF 8&9 Speed ATF™ Automatic Transmission Fluid or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
We recommend you use Shell Automatic Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE
75W-85.
We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703. If DOT
3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Hydraulic Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid +4, or MOPAR®
ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
7
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
8
640 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
whichever comes first.
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for Severe Duty All Models
scheduled maintenance.
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser- type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will • Check engine oil level
influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is
displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the • Check windshield washer fluid level
change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles • Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as
wear or damage
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
master cylinder and power steering, and fill as needed.
message after completing the scheduled oil change.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 641
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for required maintenance.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system
turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
8
642 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, and replace if necessary.
Inspect the front and rear axle
fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, offroad or frequent trailer towing.
Inspect the brake linings, parking
brake function.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
Maintenance Chart
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect transfer case fluid.
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Replace spark plugs.**
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) whichever
comes first.
Change transfer case fluid.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 643
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8
X
X
X
X
X
X
644 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .647
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .647 䡵 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .651
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .648
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.. . .651
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . . . . .648
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649 䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .652
9
646 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 647
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
648 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- FCA US LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (800) 423-6343
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 649
Mexico, D. F.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Service Contract
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
9
650 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 651
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
dealer, and the manufacturer.
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
operating at its best.
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: AdminisREPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
MOPAR® PARTS
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immeIf NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Transa group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
9
652 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acdiagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procomplete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward lan- cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety
tips.
guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 653
Call toll free at:
Treadwear
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
9
654 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor- passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
mance.
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
656 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .196
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 68
Air Bag Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Air Bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78, 112, 290
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .588
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396, 591
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips. . . . . . . . . . .395, 397
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590, 591
Air Conditioning System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389, 590
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19, 290
All Wheel Drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
INDEX 657
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601, 633
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . .381, 389
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428, 611
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610, 611
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610, 637
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .255
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .26
Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607, 637
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455, 606
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455, 456
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
10
658 INDEX
Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627, 629 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .581
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452 Checks, Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111, 505 Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . .100
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint . . . .99
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
INDEX 659
Locating The LATCH Anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .90
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .86
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .604
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600, 604
Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . .601, 633, 634
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
10
660 INDEX
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors . . . . . .34
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31, 33
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Driver Information Display
DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System™) . . . . . .356
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Economy (Fuel) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .255
Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case. . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise
Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192, 193, 196
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .581
INDEX 661
Engine
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579, 580
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . .579, 580
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111, 505
Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501, 633
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584, 633
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585, 633, 634
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586, 587
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111, 505
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111, 598
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 627
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396, 591
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 290, 631, 632
10
662 INDEX
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506, 507
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .634
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290, 631
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Front Axle (Differential). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501, 633
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
INDEX 663
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506 GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Gauges
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131, 274
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501 Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516 Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515 HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . . . .242
10
664 INDEX
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546, 552
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Key Fob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122, 123
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .19, 26
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .19, 26
Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Unlock Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .184 Keyless Enter-N-Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
iPod®/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . .35, 324
Unlock Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45, 324
Jacking And Tire Changing Instructions . . . . . . . . .551
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
INDEX 665
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 172
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78, 112, 290
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290, 631
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629, 630
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .290
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179, 240
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
Rear Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
10
666 INDEX
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .290, 581
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Memory Seats And Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122, 123
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589 MOPAR® Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583, 651
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .290
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 172, 631, 632
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
INDEX 667
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586, 587, 633
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501 Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303, 584 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .6, 652
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584 Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588 Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587 ParkSense® System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586 Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587 Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585, 633 Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
10
668 INDEX
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .474
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .255
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142, 144
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449, 452, 637
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .23
Quadra-Trac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . .
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . .
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . .
Rear Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Wiper/Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.481
.604
.379
.377
.352
.187
.391
.608
.237
.138
.261
.229
.157
.273
.273
INDEX 669
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . .535
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . .538
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .19, 26
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .19, 26
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .377
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Uconnect® Customer Programmable
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31, 327
Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31, 327
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
10
670 INDEX
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Seat Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51, 112
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .57
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Seat Belt
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51, 52, 55
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . .57
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .60
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode . . . . . . .62
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Engage The Automatic Locking Mode . . . . . . . . .62
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141, 142
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
INDEX 671
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Security Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19, 290
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Security System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
SENTRY KEY®
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425, 428
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 290, 631, 632
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Snow Plow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484, 485, 486, 548
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634, 637
Speed Control
Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . .192, 193, 196
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 420
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423, 425
Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
10
672 INDEX
Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449, 452
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188, 189
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188, 189
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .377
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396, 627
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag . . . . . . . . .67
Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Telescoping Steering Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . .188, 189
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .389
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Tilt Steering Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188, 189
Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . .473, 474
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 478, 484, 653
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478, 484
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
INDEX 673
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473, 474
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467, 478
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484, 486, 548
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515, 573
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome .
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . .
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronically Shifted . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.520
.532
.520
.532
.457
.462
.515
.530
.519
.524
.523
.528
.520
.520
.609
.437
.637
.609
.428
10
674 INDEX
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428, 610
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .26
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®). . . .242
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless
Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 26
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .23
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290, 631, 632
Customer Programmable Features . . . .33, 35, 45, 324
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . .33, 35, 45, 324
Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45, 324
Uconnect® Voice Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474, 513
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Vehicle Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396, 627
Uconnect®
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . .31, 327 Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586, 587
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Screen Activated Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25, 31, 327 Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Uconnect® Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
INDEX 675
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
Washers, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183, 597
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 254
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
2015 Durango
2015
OWNER’S MANUAL
FCA US LLC
15WD01-126-AE
15WD01-126-AD
Fifth Edition
Fourth
Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Printed
U.S.A.
Durango
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising